Sony PDW R1 User Manual

PROFESSIONAL DISC RECORDER  
PDW-R1  
OPERATION MANUAL [English]  
1st Edition (Revised 1)  
If you have questions on the use of the above Power Cord/  
Appliance Connector/Plug, please consult a qualified service  
personnel.  
Denna etikett finns på ovansidan av driftenheten.  
Denne mærkat sidder på drevenhedens øverste panel.  
Tämä kyltti sijaitsee ajurilaitteen yläpinnalla.  
When installing the installation space must be secured in  
consideration of the ventilation and service operation.  
• Do not block the ventilation slots at the left side and right  
side panels, and vents of the fans.  
• Leave a space around the unit for ventilation.  
• Leave more than 40 cm of space in the rear of the unit to  
secure the operation area.  
Dette merket er plassert på oversiden av driverenheten.  
CAUTION  
The use of optical instruments with this product will increase  
eye hazard.  
When the unit is installed on the desk or the like, leave at least  
4 cm of space in the left and right sides.  
Leaving 40 cm or more of space above the unit is  
recommended for service operation.  
CAUTION  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures  
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous  
radiation exposure.  
VAROITUS!  
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ  
KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA  
ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1  
YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.  
VARNING  
OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA  
BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN  
UTSÄTTAS FÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM  
ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.  
This Professional Disc Recorder is classified as a CLASS 1  
LASER PRODUCT.  
Laser diode properties  
Wavelength: 403 to 410 nm  
Emission duration: Continuous  
Laser output power: 65 mW (max. of pulse peak), 35 mW  
(max. of CW)  
For the customers in the USA  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference  
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try  
to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
Tekniska data för laserdiod  
Våglängd: 403 till 410 nm  
Emissionslängd: Kontinuerlig  
Laseruteffekt: 65 mW (max. för pulstopp), 35 mW (max. för  
kontinuerlig våg)  
Spesifikasjoner laserdiode  
Bølgelengde: 403 til 410 nm  
Strålingens varighet: Kontinuerlig  
Laserens effekt: 65 mW (maks stråletoppunkt), 35 mW  
(maks ved kontinuerlig stråling)  
Laserdiodin ominaisuudet  
Aallon pituus: 403 - 410 nm  
Välityksen kesto: Jatkuva  
Laserlähdön teho: 65 mW (sykehuipun maks.), 35 mW  
(jatkuvan aallon maks.)  
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
- Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different  
from that to which the receiver is connected.  
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for  
help.  
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not  
expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to  
operate this equipment.  
All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be  
shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device  
pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.  
This label is located on the top panel of the drive unit.  
3
For the customers in the USA and Canada  
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES  
Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable.  
You can help preserve our environment  
by returning your used rechargeable  
batteries to the collection and recycling  
location nearest you.  
For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable  
batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-8837, or visit  
http://www.rbrc.org/  
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium-ion  
batteries.  
For the customers in Europe  
This product with the CE marking complies with both the EMC  
Directive (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/  
EEC) issued by the Commission of the European Community.  
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the  
following European standards:  
• EN60065: Product Safety  
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)  
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)  
This product is intended for use in the following  
Electromagnetic Environment(s):  
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3  
(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex. TV  
studio).  
WARNING  
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones  
can cause hearing loss.  
In order to use this product safely, avoid prolonged listening at  
excessive sound pressure levels.  
Voor de Klanten in Nederland  
• Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever deze in als klein  
chemisch afval (KCA).  
• Dit apparaat bevat een vast ingebouwde batterij die niet  
vervangen hoeft te worden tijdens de levensduur van het  
apparaat.  
• Raadpleeg uw leverancier indien de batterij toch vervangen  
moet worden.  
De batterij mag alleen vervangen worden door vakbekwaam  
servicepersoneel.  
• Lever het apparaat aan het einde van de levensduur in voor  
recycling, de batterij zal dan op correcte wijze verwerkt  
worden.  
For the Customers in Taiwan only  
4
Table of Contents  
4-1-2 Recording Time Code and User Bit  
4-1-4 Auto Clip List Recording for Automatic  
Lists..................................................48  
3-1-2 Connections for Using PDZ-1 Proxy  
3-1-3 Connecting to a Nonlinear Editing  
3-1-4 Connections for Recording in Parallel  
3-1-6 Using the RM-280 Editing  
5-3-1 Loading a Clip List From Disc Into Unit  
3-6-1 Discs Used for Recording and  
5-3-3 Clearing the Current Clip List From the  
5-3-4 Presetting the Initial Time Code of the  
5-4 Using PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing  
3-6-6 To Eject Discs With the Unit Powered  
3-6-7 Handling of Discs When Recording  
Table of Contents  
5
6-1-4 Assigning User-Defined Clip and Clip  
FAM and FTP Connections.............. 88  
This Unit................................................. 135  
License................................................... 148  
6
Table of Contents  
Before Using the Unit  
Setting  
525U  
525J  
Line mode  
Setting the Line Mode  
525(U): NTSC (areas outside Japan)  
525(J): NTSC (Japan)  
625: PAL  
This unit is shipped with the line mode still unset.  
Therefore you need to set the line mode before using the  
unit. (The unit cannot be used unless the line mode is set.)  
Once it is set, the line mode is retained even when the unit  
is powered off.  
625  
3
When the desired setting appears, release the  
SHUTTLE button.  
“Push SET !!” appears.  
Setting procedure  
Use the following procedure to set the line mode.  
Time data display  
To redo the selection  
Repeat step 2.  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
4
5
Press the SET button.  
“Turn OFF !!” appears.  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
CH  
-
15 CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
STATUS CHARACTER  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
1
5
a)  
AC power switch (rear panel)  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
Power the unit off, and then power it on again.  
The selected line mode becomes available for use.  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
You can change the setting made with this procedure  
by using basic menu item 013 “525/625 SYSTEM  
94) for more information about how to make basic  
menu settings.  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
4
2,3  
a) If you are using DC power or a battery pack, connect the DC power  
or mount the battery pack on the battery pack shoe beforehand.  
Note  
The line mode is not set, or is cleared, in the following  
situations. Reset the line mode.  
• The unit is powered off before performing step 4 in the  
previous procedure.  
• The “RESET ALL SETUP” command in the  
maintenance menu (see page 112) is executed.  
1
2
Power the unit on.  
“Select ----” appears in the time data display.  
Settings affected by the line mode  
The following settings are affected when the line mode is  
changed.  
With the SHUTTLE button held down, rotate the jog  
dial.  
• Alarm message language  
525(J): Japanese  
525(U)/625: English  
• The following menu item names, setting values, or  
factory default setting values  
When you rotate the jog dial in the forward direction,  
the “----” part of the display changes in the sequence  
525U > 525J > 625. When you rotate it in the reverse  
direction, the display changes in the sequence 625 >  
525J > 525U.  
Before Using the Unit  
7
       
a)  
Item Item name  
No.  
Settings  
525 (U)/525 (J) 625  
Basic menu  
002 CHARACTER 00 to 0A to 2A  
H-POSITION  
00 to 09 to 29  
00 to 37 to 43  
003 CHARACTER 00 to 2E to 38  
V-POSITION  
Extended menu  
601 VITC  
POSITION  
12H to 16H to  
20H  
9H to 19H to 22H  
9H to 21H to 22H  
No item  
SEL-1  
602 VITC  
12H to 18H to  
20H  
POSITION  
SEL-2  
628 DF MODE  
Item  
652 UMID SDI  
VANC LINE  
12 H to 17 H to 9 H to 17 H to  
19 H 18 H  
660 ESSENCE  
MARK SDI  
12 H to 17 H to 9 H to 17 H to  
19 H  
18 H  
VANC LINE  
703 BLANK LINE Setting range:  
Setting range:  
SELECT  
ALL LINE, LINE ALL LINE, LINE  
12 to LINE 20  
(525(U))/LINE  
12 to LINE 21  
(525(J))  
9, 332 to LINE  
22, 335, LINE 23  
710 INTERNAL  
VIDEO  
BB, CB75,  
CB100  
BB, CB75,  
CB100  
SIGNAL  
GENERATOR  
713 VIDEO  
SETUP  
Item  
No item  
REFERENCE  
723 INPUT  
VIDEO  
Setting range:  
ALL LINE, LINE ALL LINE, LINE  
12 to LINE 20  
Setting range:  
BLANK  
9, 332 to LINE  
22, 335  
a) Underlined values are the factory defaults.  
• The following video processing parameters  
Parameter name 525 (U)/525 (J)  
625  
Setup level  
Black level  
Item  
No item  
Item  
No item  
8
Before Using the Unit  
Overview  
1
Chapter  
Thumbnail search operation  
Simply press the THUMBNAIL button and the PDW-R1  
instantly displays thumbnails on the video panel or a  
connected monitor. You can easily cue up the desired  
scene by guiding the cursor to the corresponding  
thumbnail and confirming your selection with the SET  
button.  
1-1Features  
The PDW-R1 is a convenient, compact, and lightweight  
optical disc recorder. It allows you to record to optical  
discs, play back optical discs, and record audio and video  
1)  
data files transferred over the S400 (i.LINK ) connector  
and  
(network) connector. It is ideal for field  
Scene selection  
You can create and play back clip lists of selected clips  
from the disc, arranged in any order.  
applications and for desktop viewing by journalists,  
producers, and other production staff.  
1) i.LINK is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
One disc can store up to 99 clip lists.  
Clip lists make it simple to perform offline editing in the  
field for later use with full-scale nonlinear editing systems  
(XPRI , etc.).  
The features of the PDW-R1 include the following.  
1)  
MPEG IMX/DVCAM recording  
1) XPRI is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
The PDW-R1 offers the capability to record and play back  
1)  
1)  
both MPEG IMX and DVCAM streams. Users have  
the flexibility to select from these formats according to  
their picture-quality needs, or to match their editing-  
format requirements.  
Quick picture search by jog and shuttle  
dials  
The PDW-R1 has jog and shuttle dials as a conventional  
VTR to search picture in a clip. The jog dial is for frame-  
by-frame search at –1 to +1 times normal speed and the  
shuttle dial is for high-speed search at 20 times normal  
speed.  
1) MPEG IMX and DVCAM are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
Proxy AV data  
Proxy AV data is a low-resolution, MPEG-4 based version  
of a full-resolution MPEG IMX/DVCAM stream (a video  
bandwidth of 1.5 Mbps and an audio bandwidth of 64 kbps  
per channel). Whenever a recording is made, the unit  
automatically generates proxy AV data from the full-  
resolution data and records it on the Professional Disc.  
Proxy AV data is much smaller in size than the full-  
resolution IMX or DVCAM data. It can be transferred  
quickly over computer networks, easily edited in the field  
with laptop computers, and readily used in a wide variety  
of applications, such as content management on small-  
scale servers.  
IT-friendly system  
In the PDW-R1, clips are recorded as video and audio data  
1)  
files . This file-based recording system also allows  
material to be viewed directly on a computer linked to the  
unit via an i.LINK (file access mode, called FAM below)  
connection—in the same way that a computer reads data  
files on an external drive. The interfaces include the  
S400 (i.LINK) connector, supporting AV/C (Audio/  
Video Control) and i.LINK (FAM) protocols, and  
(network) connector. The  
(network) connector  
supports MXF (Material eXchange Format) file transfer  
capability to exchange contents with other equipment  
supporting MXF.  
1-1 Features  
9
             
1) A clip is created every time recording is stopped.  
• The output from external DV devices (VTRs, nonlinear  
editors, etc.) can be input to this unit and recorded on  
Professional Discs.  
•Video and audio data are always recorded in empty sections of the disc.  
Recording begins instantly, even after playback, without overwriting  
existing video on the disc.  
•Recording is done in clip units, which makes it simple to delete a clip  
immediately after shooting if it is judged to be unneeded.  
•During playback, thumbnail lists make it easy to identify clips. The  
random access nature of the media allows the NEXT and PREV buttons  
to jump instantly to clip start frames, making it easy to check the video  
and audio in the clips.  
Computer access to files (file access mode)  
Use of application software which supports the XDCAM  
1)  
series enables random access to video, audio, and  
metadata files on Professional Discs, with the ability to  
display file lists and perform file-based reads and  
overwrites.  
•i.LINK (FAM) or network connections make it possible to transfer clip  
files at high speed between this unit and remote computers.  
Files can be transferred at high speed, and thumbnail lists  
of disc contents can be viewed on computer screens.  
Flexible metadata recording  
XDCAM can record various types of metadata together  
1)  
1) Such software includes the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software and  
the XPRI series.  
with video and audio data, such as the date and time of  
shooting, the cameraman, the recording method, and  
comments about the material. This metadata can be used in  
applications such as the following.  
• The supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software can be  
used to add titles, comments, and other text data to discs  
and clips.  
• Computer-readable text files can be recorded on the  
Professional Disc, to allow systematic content  
management.  
Equipped with network connector  
This network connector of unit can be connected to  
computers and networks to enable high-speed file transfers  
and display of lists of the video, audio, and metadata files  
stored on Professional Discs. Workflows can be improved  
by the ability to use FTP commands to transfer files to  
remote locations.  
• The ability to search metadata for the required audio and  
video scenes brings greater efficiency to various stages  
of the video production process (editing, archiving, etc.).  
Color LCD built-in  
With the built-in 3.5-inch type color LCD screen, you can  
display contents on the disc without an external monitor.  
1) XDCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
Supports a variety of interfaces  
The PDW-R1 supports a variety of interfaces and is  
suitable for use with various nonlinear editing systems.  
Compact size, lightweight and battery-  
powered operation  
The PDW-R1 is designed small and light enough to carry  
out to the field and it is operable with battery to work  
speedily in the field.  
Analog interfaces  
Video: The unit can input and output a composite analog  
video signal.  
Audio: The unit has two audio channels. When in 4-  
channel mode, you can input two channels of audio  
either as channels 1 and 2 or as channels 3 and 4. The  
two audio channels can be output also either as  
channels 1 and 2 or as channels 3 and 4.  
Supporting SNMP for service and  
maintenance  
The PDW-R1 is compatible with Sony remote  
maintenance and monitoring software—an SNMP-  
compliant application that can monitor and log the  
hardware’s status in real time via a TCP/IP network. If a  
malfunction is detected, this system can immediately  
identify the problem, allowing you to take corrective  
action.  
Digital interfaces  
SDI (Serial Digital Interface)/AES/EBU: This allows  
the unit to input and output D1 (component) format  
digital video and audio signals and also AES/EBU-  
format digital audio signals.  
Equipped with i.LINK connector  
The i.LINK connector of this unit supports the following  
two functions.  
Input and output of DV streams (AV/C mode)  
• DV streams can be output from this unit and recorded on  
standard DV equipment.  
• During MPEG IMX playback, the playback signals can  
be converted and output as DV streams, allowing you to  
connect DV-compatible nonlinear editors.  
10  
1-1 Features  
         
Names and Functions of  
Parts  
2
Chapter  
2-1 Configuration  
Operation of the PDW-R1 uses the parts shown in the  
following figure.  
Security slot  
You can fit a commercially available  
security cable into this slot.  
AC power switch (rear panel)  
Press " to power on; press a to  
power off.  
a)  
Battery pack shoe (covered)  
a) For information about how to use your  
security cable, refer to the instructions  
provided with the security cable.  
Press here to raise the cover.  
Shoulder belt posts  
Carrying handle  
Use this to carry the unit.  
Disc slot and EJECT button  
Cable clamp (see page 22)  
I
Control panel (see page 12)  
Connectors (see page 21)  
Built-in speaker (monaural)  
2-1 Configuration  
11  
                               
2-2 Control Panel  
1 ACCESS indicator  
2 On/standby switch and indicator  
3 Remote control switch and NETWORK access indicator  
4 KEY INHI switch  
1 Time data settings section (see page 13)  
2 Operating mode selection/menu setting section (see page 13)  
3 Jog/shuttle control block (see page 14)  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
TC  
PRESET  
COUNTER  
SEL  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
EXT  
REMOTE  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F REV  
F FWD  
END  
MARK2  
6 Arrow buttons (see page 16)  
5 Recording and playback control section (see page 16)  
4 Audio settings section (see page 15)  
a ACCESS indicator  
c Remote control switch and NETWORK access  
indicator  
Different positions of the switch allow different operations  
This lights when the disc is accessed and when a file is  
opened by a FAM or FTP connections (see page 72).  
If the on/standby switch is set to the 1 position while this  
indicator is lit, access to the disc is completed before the  
unit switches to the standby state.  
as follows.  
NETWORK: Enables access to the network. The  
indicator lights when an external network device is  
being accessed. In this state, operation from the  
control panel is not possible.  
Note  
LOCAL: Enables operation from the control panel.  
REMOTE: Enables remote control of the PDW-R1 from  
a device connected to the S400 (i.LINK) connector  
or REMOTE connector on the side panel.  
Use extended menu item 214 “REMOTE  
INTERFACE” to select which of the connectors is  
used.  
While the ACCESS indicator is lit, do not turn off the AC  
power switch, disconnect the power cord, or remove the  
battery. This could lead to a loss of data from the disc.  
b On/standby ("/1) switch and indicator  
When the AC power switch on the rear panel is in the "  
position, or a battery is loaded, this switches the PDW-R1  
between the operating (") and standby (1) states. When  
the switch is moved to the " position, the indicator lights.  
When the switch is moved to the 1 position, the indicator  
goes off.  
for more information about how to make extended  
menu settings.  
When operating the PDW-R1 from an AC power supply,  
normally leave the AC power switch in the " position, and  
switch the PDW-R1 between the operating and standby  
states using the on/standby switch.  
d KEY INHI (key inhibit) switch  
Setting this switch to ON lights the KEY INHI indicator  
and disables the switches and buttons that are set to “dis”  
with extended menu item 118 “KEY INHIBIT.”  
12  
2-2 Control Panel  
                           
Make the UB or VIUB selection in extended menu  
item 629 “TC SELECT.”  
1 Time data settings section  
COUNTER: The elapsed recording/playback time (hours,  
minutes, seconds, frames). This can be reset by  
pressing the RESET button (see page 14).  
The corresponding indicator above the time data display  
lights according to the setting.  
1 INT/EXT/RP188 switch  
2 PRESET/REGEN switch  
3 F-RUN/R-RUNswitch  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
HOLD  
You can also synchronize timecode with the time of the  
internal clock. For details, see “To set time code to the  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
EXT  
RP188  
REGEN  
4 COUNTER SEL button  
e HOLD button  
5 HOLD button  
Press this button to stop the time code generator.  
Also, when setting the time code or user bits to be  
recorded, press this button first, to hold the values.  
a INT/EXT/RP188 (internal/external/RP188  
selector) switch  
Before recording time code, select the type of time code  
2 Operating mode selection/menu setting  
section  
with this switch.  
INT: Use time code generated internally by this unit.  
EXT: Use time code input from an external source.  
RP188: Use SMPTE RP188 LTC in an SDI signal.  
1 SUBCLIP button  
2 THUMBNAIL button  
b PRESET/REGEN (regeneration) switch  
This switch selects whether to preset a new time code  
value or follow already recorded time code.  
PRESET: Record time code starting with a preset initial  
value.  
3 SHIFT button  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
SHIFT  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
REGEN: Record time code continuous with existing time  
code on the disc. Regardless of the setting of the F-  
RUN/R-RUN switch, the unit operates in R-RUN  
mode.  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
6 RESET button  
5 SET button  
4 MENU button  
c F-RUN/R-RUN (free run/recording run) switch  
This switch selects the operating mode of the internal time  
code generator.  
F-RUN: Time code advances regardless of the operating  
state of the unit. Use this setting to align the time code  
with real time or to synchronize the time code with  
external time code.  
R-RUN: Time code advances only during recording. Use  
this setting to obtain consecutive time code on the disc.  
a SUBCLIP button  
To play back following a clip list, press this button, turning  
it on (see page 54). This is also effective for jog and shuttle  
operations.  
To play clips in the order they are recorded, press this  
button again, turning it off.  
The CLIP menu (see page 68) appears in the time data  
display, in the video panel, and on an external monitor  
when you press this button with the SHIFT button held  
down. Press the MENU button to escape from the CLIP  
menu.  
d COUNTER SEL button  
This cycles the data displayed in the time data display  
through the sequence TC, UB, and COUNTER.  
TC: The playback time code read by the internal time code  
reader, or the time code generated by the internal time  
code generator.  
Note  
If no clip list is registered, this button does not light when  
pressed. The operation is invalid.  
Make the TC or VITC selection in extended menu item  
629 “TC SELECT.”  
b THUMBNAIL button  
UB: The user bits inserted in the playback time code, or  
user bits generated by the internal time code generator.  
To carry out a thumbnail search or create a clip list, press  
this button turning it on. Thumbnail images representing  
2-2 Control Panel  
13  
                                   
each clip or sub-clip appear. Press once more to turn the  
button off, and return to a whole-screen display.  
To display the thumbnails of essence mark frames (frames  
with an essence mark attached), hold down the SHIFT  
button, and press this button. The essence mark selection  
menu appears. Select the desired type of essence mark, and  
the corresponding essence mark frames appear in  
thumbnails. Press once more, turning the button off, to  
return to a whole-screen display.  
3 Jog/shuttle control block  
1 SHUTTLE button  
2 Jog/shuttle transport  
indicators  
3 JOG button  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
c SHIFT button  
Use to switch the functions of various buttons.  
d MENU button  
Use for setup menu and system menu operations. Pressing  
this button displays the setting of a setup menu item in the  
time data display. The same information is also  
superimposed on the displays of the video panel and a  
monitor connected to this unit (see page 94). Press once  
more to return to the original display. The system menu  
(see page 117) appears in the time data display, in the  
video panel, and on an external monitor, when you press  
this button with the SHIFT button held down. Press this  
button again to escape from the system menu.  
5 Shuttle dial  
4 Jog dial  
For details of playback operations with these buttons and  
e SET button  
Use for setup menu settings (see page 94), scene selection  
(thumbnail search) settings, and so on.  
a SHUTTLE button  
To play back in shuttle mode using the shuttle dial, press  
this button, turning it on.  
This button switches to shuttle mode whenever it is  
pressed, even during recording. If you do not want  
recording to stop with this button, set extended menu item  
145 “MODE KEY ENABLE DURING RECORDING” to  
“stop.”  
The scene selection window or a menu for sub clip  
operations appears when you press this button with the  
SHIFT button held down with either of the following  
displayed. The window or menu appears in the video  
panel, and on an external monitor.  
When a thumbnail screen is displayed: The scene  
selection window (see page 62) appears.  
When a sub clip thumbnail is displayed: A sub clip  
operation menu (see page 64) appears.  
Pressing the JOG button or turning the jog dial switches to  
jog mode.  
b Jog/shuttle transport indicators  
These show the playback direction in jog or shuttle speed  
mode.  
b (green): Lights during playback in the reverse direction.  
B (green): Lights during playback in the forward direction.  
x (red): Lights during still image display.  
f RESET button  
Press to reset the counter. This is also used to cancel or  
abandon setup menu settings and scene selection  
(thumbnail search).  
c JOG button  
To play back in jog mode using the jog dial, press this  
button, turning it on.  
This button switches to jog mode whenever it is pressed,  
even during recording. If you do not want recording to stop  
wih this button, set extended menu item 145 “MODE KEY  
ENABLE DURING RECORDING” to “stop.”  
Pressing the SHUTTLE button or turning the shuttle dial  
switches to shuttle mode.  
d Jog dial  
Turn this for playback in jog mode. Turn clockwise for  
forward direction playback, and counterclockwise for  
reverse direction playback. In jog mode, the playback  
14  
2-2 Control Panel  
                       
speed varies in the range 1 times normal speed, according  
to the rotation rate of the jog dial. There are no detents.  
Normally, you press the JOG button before turning the jog  
dial, but it is also possible to make a setting to enable jog  
mode directly by turning the dial (set extended menu item  
101 “SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE” to  
“dial”).  
b ALL/CH-1, CH-2 to CH-4 (audio level) adjustment  
knobs  
Depending on the setting of the VARIABLE switch, these  
adjust the input audio or playback audio levels of channels  
1 to 4.  
By the setting of extended menu item 131 “AUDIO  
VOLUME,” you can enable the ALL/CH-1 knob to  
simultaneously adjust all eight channels. When this  
simultaneous adjustment is enabled the ALL indicator  
lights.  
e Shuttle dial  
Turn this for playback in shuttle mode. Turn clockwise for  
forward direction playback, and counterclockwise for  
reverse direction playback. In shuttle mode, the playback  
speed varies in the range 20 times normal speed (using  
MPEG IMX/DVCAM), according to the angular position  
of the shuttle dial. The shuttle dial has a detent at the center  
position, for still image playback.  
Normally, you press the SHUTTLE button before turning  
the shuttle dial, but it is also possible to make a setting to  
enable shuttle mode directly by turning the dial (set  
extended menu item 101 “SELECTION FOR SEARCH  
DIAL ENABLE” to “dial”).  
c AUDIO METER SEL (selection) button  
When using MPEG IMX format in eight-channel mode,  
select whether the audio level meters should display  
channels 1 to 4 or channels 5 to 8.  
Pressing this button toggles the selection, and the audio  
level meter channel display also changes.  
The factory default is for channels 1 to 4 to be selected.  
d AUDIO MONITOR SEL (selection) button  
This button selects two channels from among the up to  
eight audio signal channels. You can monitor the audio of  
the selected channels (the left and right channels in the  
case of stereo output) with the PHONES jack on the front  
panel and the built-in speaker.  
Pressing this button cycles through the following five  
channel combinations.  
tr1/2: Channels 1 (left) and 2 (right)  
Note  
When extended menu item 101 “SELECTION FOR  
SEARCH DIAL ENABLE” is set to “dial,” after using the  
shuttle dial, return it to the center position. If the shuttle  
dial is not in the center position, it is possible occasionally  
for vibration from other operations to activate the dial, and  
start playback in shuttle mode.  
tr3/4: Channels 3 (left) and 4 (right)  
tr5/6: Channels 5 (left) and 6 (right)  
tr7/8: Channels 7 (left) and 8 (right)  
4 Audio settings section  
MENU: Audio channels selected with extended menu  
item 837 and 838 “AUDIO MONITOR CHANNEL  
ARRANGE”  
The factory default is for channels 1 (left) and 2 (right) to  
be selected.  
1 VARIABLE switch  
ALL indicator  
2 ALL/CH1, CH-2 to CH4  
adjustment knobs  
You can select whether to monitor both of the selected  
channels or only one, by pressing this button with the  
SHIFT button held down. Each press selects stereo, right,  
or left.  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
SEL  
SEL  
PRESET  
PB  
ST: Stereo audio is output from the PHONES jack.  
Monaural audio, the left and right channels mixed, is  
output from the built-in speaker.  
L/ST/R  
AUDIO  
3 AUDIO METER SEL button  
R: The right channel audio is output from the PHONES  
jack and the built-in speaker.  
4 AUDIO MONITOR SEL button  
L: The left channel audio is output from the PHONES jack  
and the built-in speaker.  
a VARIABLE (audio level adjustment selector)  
switch  
This selects which of the input audio and playback audio  
has the level adjusted by the ALL/CH-1, and CH-2 to CH-  
4 adjustment knobs.  
REC: Adjust the input audio levels. The playback audio  
levels are fixed at their preset values.  
PRESET: Do not adjust the audio levels.  
PB: Adjust the playback audio levels. The input audio  
levels are fixed at their preset values.  
2-2 Control Panel  
15  
                   
e REC (record) button  
5 Recording and playback control section  
To start recording, hold down this button, and press the  
PLAY button. The recording takes place on an unrecorded  
part of the disc.  
To stop recording, press the STOP button.  
This creates a clip of the recorded portion.  
1 PREV button  
2 PLAY button  
3 NEXT button  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
6 Arrow buttons  
TOP  
F REV  
F FWD  
END  
The four arrow buttons are also used as the MARK1  
button, MARK2 button, IN button, and OUT button. The  
correspondence with the buttons is as follows.  
F button: MARK1 button  
4 STOP button  
5 REC button  
f button: MARK2 button  
a PREV (previous) button  
G button: IN button  
g button: OUT button  
You can use these buttons for thumbnail selection, menu  
setting operations, setting IN/OUT points, and so on.  
Press this button, turning it on, to show the first frame of  
the current clip. While the first frame of a clip is shown,  
pressing this button jumps to the beginning of the previous  
clip.  
This button is also used together with other buttons for the  
following operations.  
1 F/MARK1 button and f/MARK2 button  
Reverse direction high-speed search: Hold down the  
PLAY button, and press this button. A high-speed  
search in the reverse direction is carried out.  
Displaying the first frame of the first clip: Hold down  
the SHIFT button, and press this button.  
2 G/IN button and g/OUT  
button  
MARK1  
IN  
OUT  
MARK2  
b PLAY (playback) button  
To start playback, press this button, turning it on.  
This button stops recording whenever it is pressed, even  
during recording. If you do not want recording to stop with  
this button, set extended menu item 145 “MODE KEY  
ENABLE DURING RECORDING” to “stop.”  
3 IN indicator and OUT indicator  
a F/MARK1 button and f/MARK2 button  
When the THUMBNAIL button (see page 13) is lit, you  
can use these for thumbnail selection.  
During recording and playback, the F/MARK1 and f/  
MARK2 buttons can be pressed with the SET button held  
down to record a shot mark 1 or shot mark 2 as an essence  
mark.  
c NEXT button  
Press this button, turning it on, to jump to the next clip, and  
show the first frame.  
This button is also used together with other buttons for the  
following operations.  
Forward direction high-speed search: Hold down the  
PLAY button, and press this button. A high-speed  
search in the forward direction is carried out.  
Displaying the last frame of the last clip: Hold down the  
SHIFT button, and press this button.  
To delete or change essence marks, use the supplied PDZ-  
1 Proxy Browsing Software.  
b G/IN button and g/OUT button  
When the THUMBNAIL button (see page 13) is lit, you  
can use these for thumbnail selection.  
An In or Out point is set when you press the SET button  
with the G/IN or g/OUT button held down. The In or Out  
point setting is deleted when you press the RESET button  
with the G/IN or g/OUT button held down.  
d STOP button  
To stop recording or playback, press this button, turning it  
on. The frame at the stop point appears.  
The unit enters standby off mode when you press this  
button with the SHIFT button held down. It returns from  
standby off mode to the original state when you press this  
button again with the SHIFT button held down. (The lit or  
unlit status of the STOP button does not change.)  
c IN indicator and OUT indicator  
IN indicator: When an IN point is set, this lights.  
If an attempt is made to set the IN point after a  
recorded OUT point, this flashes.  
OUT indicator: When an OUT point is set, this lights.  
If an attempt is made to set the OUT point before a  
recorded IN point, this flashes.  
This unit can automatically enter standby off mode  
whenever a specified time elapses in disc stop mode. For  
details, see the description of extended menu item 501  
“STILL TIMER” (page 101).  
16  
2-2 Control Panel  
                               
2-3 LCD Panel  
1 Indicators on the back of the LCD panel  
1 Status display (see page 18)  
2 Video panel (color)  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
CH  
-
15 CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
STATUS CHARACTER  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
3 Display settings section (see page 19)  
5 REC INHI indicator  
4 KEY INHI indicator  
3 WARNING indicator  
2 Audio and video settings section (see page 19)  
a Indicators on the back of the LCD panel  
There are two indicators, as follows.  
Note  
While the ACCESS indicator is lit, do not turn off the AC  
power switch, disconnect the power cord, or remove the  
battery. This could lead to a loss of data from the disc.  
b Video panel (color)  
In recording, playback and editing operations, this shows  
recording and playback video, thumbnails, and other  
images. A status screen appears here when you press the  
STATUS button (see page 19).  
OPERATION ACCESS  
ACCESS indicator  
c WARNING indicator  
OPERATION indicator  
This lights when condensation within the PDW-R1, a laser  
diode fault, or another hardware error is detected. It goes  
off when the error state is cleared. When this indicator is  
lit, the time data display and video panel show an error  
message.  
OPERATION indicator: Lights when the on/standby  
switch on the control panel is in the on (") position.  
ACCESS indicator: Lights when the disc is being  
accessed. If the on/standby switch is set to the 1  
position while this indicator is lit, access to the disc is  
completed before the unit switches to the standby  
state.  
d KEY INHI (key inhibit) indicator  
This lights when the KEY INHI switch is set to on, with  
either “MON./INPUT SEL” or “CONTROL PANEL” set  
to “dis” in extended menu item 118 “KEY INHIBIT.”  
2-3 LCD Panel  
17  
               
e REC INHI (recording inhibit) indicator  
This lights in the following cases.  
• When a disc with recording inhibited is loaded.  
• When extended menu item 310 “REC INHIBIT” is set to  
“on.”  
• The format of the recorded part of the disc does not  
match the settings of the PDW-R1 (number of recorded  
channels, TV system (525/625 selection), and recording  
format (DVCAM/IMX50/IMX40/IMX30 selection)).  
HOLD indicator: This lights when the internal time code  
generator (TCG) is stopped. Does not light when the  
output of the time code reader (TCR) is being  
displayed during playback and stop.  
TC/VITC (time code type) indicator: This lights when  
the COUNTER SEL button (see page 13) is set to TC.  
The time data display shows the time code.  
When extended menu item 629 “TC SELECT” is set  
to “tc,” this shows “TC,” and when “vitc” is selected,  
it shows “VITC.”  
UB/VIUB (user bit type) indicator: This lights when the  
COUNTER SEL button is set to UB. The time data  
display shows the user bits.  
1 Status display  
1 Audio level meters  
When extended menu item 629 “TC SELECT” is set  
to “tc,” this shows “UB,” and when “vitc” is selected  
it shows “VIUB.”  
2 Time data display  
indicator: This lights in the following cases.  
VITC  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
• In playback mode, when VITC is being read.  
(Regardless of what the time data display is  
showing.)  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
1)  
• When VITC is being recorded, or in E-E mode  
CH- 15  
CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
when VITC is recorded due to one of the following  
conditions.  
3 DISC remaining  
- Extended menu item 619 “VITC” is set to “on.”  
- There is VITC in the selected video input signal,  
and that line has been set to “thru” with extended  
menu item 723 “INPUT VIDEO BLANK.”  
PB (playback) indicator: This lights when the output of  
the time code reader (TCR) is being displayed.  
NDF (non-drop-frame) indicator: This lights in E-E  
mode when extended menu item 628 is set to “ndf,”  
and during playback when the clip on the disc has non-  
drop-frame time code.  
capacity indicator  
4 BATT display  
5 Disc loaded mark  
a Audio level meters  
Depending on the setting of the AUDIO METER SEL  
button (see page 15), these show the audio recording levels  
(during recording) or audio playback levels (during  
playback) of channels 1 to 4 or channels 5 to 8. If an audio  
level exceeds 0 dB, the OVER indicator lights.  
The DATA indicator lights when non-audio signals are  
played back.  
By means of a maintenance menu setting, you can display  
a reference level indicator (“-”) to the right of each meter  
when recording.  
EXT-LK (external synchronization) indicator: This  
lights when the internal time code generator is locked  
to an external signal input to the TC IN connector.  
1) E-E mode: Abbreviation of Electric to Electric mode. The mode in which  
input video and audio signals are output after passing only through the  
electrical circuits.  
c DISC remaining capacity indicator  
This shows the amount of free capacity on the current disc,  
as follows.  
xxxxxxx (7 segments lit): All capacity is available.  
As clips are recorded, the number of lit LED segments  
decreases.  
“DISC” flashing: The disc is almost full.  
“DISC” and “E” flashing: The disc is full (it must be  
replaced).  
For details of the maintenace menu, see 7-4 “Maintenance  
b Time data display  
Normally, this shows the disc playback time, time code, or  
user bit information, as selected by the COUNTER SEL  
button (see page 13) and extended menu item 629 “TC  
SELECT.”  
It is also used for error messages, setup menus, and other  
displays.  
The following indicators are located above the time data  
display.  
COUNTER indicator: This lights when a counter value  
(hours, minutes, seconds, and frames, resettable) is  
displayed in the time data display.  
d BATT (battery) status display  
This shows the amount of charge left in the battery, as  
follows.  
xxxxxxx (7 segments lit): Adequately charged. As  
the battery discharges, the number of lit LED segments  
decreases.  
“BATT” flashing: Almost exhausted. Operation of the  
PDW-R1 continues.  
18  
2-3 LCD Panel  
                                 
“BATT” and “E” flashing: Exhausted (charging  
Signals are selected in the following order. The video input  
indication in the video panel changes to reflect this.  
SDI t COMPOSITE t SG t i.LINK  
required). Operation of the PDW-R1 stops.  
e Disc loaded mark  
This lights while a disc is loaded in the PDW-R1. It flashes  
as the disc is inserted, and while it is being ejected.  
Note  
Input signals (AV/C) from the S400 (i.LINK) connector  
cannot be recorded when the basic menu item 031  
“RECORDING FORMAT” is set to “IMX 50,” “IMX40,”  
or “IMX 30.” E-E video display and audio output are also  
not possible.  
Select a signal other than “i.LINK” to record IMX format  
video signals. When i.LINK input signals are selected, set  
basic menu item 031“RECORDING FORMAT” to  
“DVCAM.”  
2 Audio and video settings section  
1 AUDIO INPUT CH button  
2 AUDIO INPUT SEL button  
3 VIDEO INPUT SEL button  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
information about how to make basic menu settings.  
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
RE  
a AUDIO INPUT CH (channel) button  
This selects the channel to which the audio input signal  
selection applies.  
Each press of this button selects the next audio input  
channel, in the following order.  
CH1 t CH2 t CH3 t CH4  
The selected channel appears in the time data display and  
video panel.  
3 Display settings section  
1 STATUS button  
2 CHARACTER switch  
3 LIGHT switch  
4 MONITOR switch  
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
STATUS CHARACTER  
You can use the AUDIO INPUT SEL button to select the  
audio input signal for the selected channel.  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
When audio is in eight-channel mode  
On channels 5 to 8, you can input only the audio signals  
embedded in an SDI signal.  
a STATUS button  
Displays information about the current settings of this unit  
in the video panel.  
The displayed information changes in the following order  
with each press of the button.  
b AUDIO INPUT SEL (selection) button  
This selects the input signal to the channel selected with  
the AUDIO INPUT CH button described above.  
Each press of this button selects the next audio input  
signal, and the audio input indications in the time data  
display and video panel change to reflect this.  
ANALOG: Analog audio signal input to the AUDIO IN  
connector  
SDI: SDI audio signal input to the SDI IN connector  
AES/EBU: AES/EBU format digital audio signal input to  
the DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) IN connector  
SG: Audio test signal generated by the internal signal  
generator  
Page 1 t Page 2 t Display off  
Items displayed on page 1  
Item  
Description  
525, 625  
Line mode selected with basic menu  
item 013  
IMX50, IMX40,  
IMX30, DVCAM  
Video recording format selected with  
basic menu item 031  
8ch, 4ch  
Number of audio recording channels  
(When the format is IMX50/40/30, this  
is the number of channels specified by  
maintenance menu item “AUDIO  
c VIDEO INPUT SEL (selection) button  
Pressing this button cycles through the following  
selections of the video input signal.  
• SDI video signal input to the SDI IN connector  
• Composite video signal input to the VIDEO IN  
connector  
• Test video signal from the internal signal generator  
• i.LINK-compliant DVCAM format digital signal  
(i.LINK input comprising both video and audio signals)  
input to the S400 (i.LINK) connector  
CONFIG” - “DATA LENGTH.” When the  
format is DVCAM, this is always 4ch.)  
VIN  
The video input signal selected with the  
VIDEO INPUT SEL button (setting  
values: SDI, COMPST, SG, i.LINK)  
AINn (n: channel  
number 1 to 4)  
The audio input signal selected with the  
AUDIO INPUT SEL button (setting  
values: SDI, AES/EBU, SG, ANALOG)  
2-3 LCD Panel  
19  
                                     
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
PROC  
This appears when at least 1 video  
processing parameter has been set to  
“VAR (VARIABLE).”  
AES/EBU 1/2  
Audio channels (setting values: tr1/2,  
tr3/4, tr5/6, tr7/8) assigned to the  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUT 1/2  
connectors with sub item 1 of extended  
menu item 827  
a)  
The line mode of the current clip on the  
disc (setting values: 525, 625), the  
video recording format (setting values:  
IMX50, IMX40, IMX30, DVCAM), and  
the number of audio recording  
DISC  
(AES/EBU) 3/4  
SDI/DV 1/2  
Audio channels (setting values: tr1/2,  
tr3/4, tr5/6, tr7/8) assigned to the  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUT 3/4  
connectors with sub item 2 of extended  
menu item 827  
channels (setting values: 8ch, 4ch)  
RMT  
When the remote control switch is set  
to REMOTE, the control interface  
selected with extended menu item 214  
(setting values: 9PIN, i.LINK,  
Audio channels (setting values: tr1/2,  
tr3/4, tr5/6, tr7/8) assigned to channels  
1 and 2 of the SDI OUT (SUPER) and  
b)  
— — —)  
S400 (i.LINK) connectors with sub  
item 1 of extended menu item 828  
PARA  
This appears when the parallel  
recording with camcorder function is  
enabled.  
(SDI/DV) 3/4  
Audio channels (setting values: tr1/2,  
tr3/4, tr5/6, tr7/8) assigned to channels  
3 and 4 of the SDI OUT (SUPER) and  
AC IN  
DC IN ??.?V  
The type of power supplied to this unit  
(AC IN: AC power, DC IN: DC power,  
S400 (i.LINK) connectors with sub  
item 2 of extended menu item 828  
BATT ??% (??.?V) BATT: battery pack). The voltage (units:  
V) appears when DC power is used,  
and the remaining battery charge (unit:  
% or V) appears when the battery pack  
is used.  
When you press this button with the SHIFT button held  
down, the process control screen appears in the video  
panel. You can use this screen to adjust the following  
parameters.  
• Video output level  
• Chroma output level  
??MIN  
Free capacity remaining on disc (unit:  
minutes)  
???  
Playback order number of clip being  
played back  
• Setup/black level  
??h??m??s??  
Duration of clip being played back  
• Chroma phase  
• Output signal sync phase  
• Output signal subcarrier phase  
a) This appears when a disc is loaded, and the format of a clip recorded on  
the disc is different from the format specified by basic menu item 031 or  
the setting of the “AUDIO CONFIG” - “DATA LENGTH” item in the  
maintenance menu.  
b) 9PIN: When extended menu item 214 is set to “9PIN”  
i.LINK: When extended menu item 214 is set to “i.LINK” and menu item  
215 is set to “AV/C”  
for more information about how to make the adjustments.  
— — —: When extended menu item 214 is set to “i.LINK” and menu item  
215 is set to “FAM” (remote control from a device connected to the  
S400 (i.LINK) connector is not possible when this combination of  
settings is in force)  
b CHARACTER switch  
Selects whether or not to superimpose the time code, menu  
settings, alarm messages, or other text information on the  
video signals output from the side panel SDI OUT  
(SUPER) and VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER) connectors and  
also on the unit’s video panel.  
ON: Superimpose character information.  
OFF: Do not superimpose character information.  
The factory default setting is ON.  
Items displayed on page 2  
Item  
Description  
VIDEO INPUT  
Same as VIN on page 1  
Same as AINn on page 1  
AUDIO INPUT n  
(n: channel  
number 1 to 4)  
c LIGHT switch  
Selects whether the status display backlight is on or off.  
ON: On.  
OFF: Off.  
The factory default setting is ON.  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
MONITOR L/R  
Audio channels selected with AUDIO  
MONITOR SEL button (setting values:  
tr1/2, tr3/4, tr5/6, tr7/8, MENU)  
(MONITOR)  
L/ST/R  
Monitor channel selected with SHIFT +  
AUDIO MONITOR SEL button (setting  
values: STEREO, R, L)  
d MONITOR switch  
Selects whether to display video in the video panel.  
H: Display with high brightness.  
L: Display with low brightness.  
OFF: Do not display.  
ANALOG 1/2  
Audio channels (setting values: tr1/2,  
tr3/4, tr5/6, tr7/8) assigned to the  
AUDIO OUT 1/3, 2/4 connectors with  
extended menu item 824  
The factory default setting is H.  
20  
2-3 LCD Panel  
     
2-4 Connectors  
Front  
1 PHONES jack and LEVEL knob  
PHONES  
Right side  
2 DC OUT 12V connector  
3 REMOTE connector  
4 REF VIDEO IN connector  
2Analog audio signal inputs/  
1Digital audio signal  
inputs/outputs (see page  
DC IN  
12V  
AUDIO IN  
1/3  
2/4  
REMOTE  
REF VIDEO IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
3/4 OUT 1/2  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
DC OUT 12V  
AC IN  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO  
SDI  
TC  
1/3  
2/4  
S400  
IN  
OUT1  
OUT2(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT  
5Time code inputs/outputs  
4 SDI signal inputs/outputs (see page 23)  
3 Analog video signal inputs/outputs (see page 23)  
S400 (i.LINK) connector  
(network) connector  
6Power supply  
section (see  
6
5
a PHONES jack and LEVEL knob  
When no headphones are connected, you can listen to  
audio through the built-in speaker (monaural).  
The jack is a standard stereo jack. Connect stereo  
headphones with an impedance of 8 ohms, to monitor the  
audio during playback. (Non-audio signals are muted.)  
The channels monitored are selected by the AUDIO  
MONITOR SEL button.  
Adjust the volume with the LEVEL knob. When extended  
menu item 820 “AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/CH2 SELECT”  
is set to “moni,” you can also cause this to simultaneously  
adjust the output volume from the AUDIO OUT 1/3 and 2/  
4 connectors on the side panel. To do this, in the setup  
menu, set extended menu item 114 “AUDIO MONITOR  
OUTPUT LEVEL” to “var.”  
b DC OUT (DC power output) 12V connector (4-pin,  
female)  
Supplies power to the BVR-3 Remote Control Unit (not  
supplied) and the RM-280 Editing Controller (not  
supplied). (Max. 5 W)  
Note  
Do not connect to any external device except those listed  
above.  
2-4 Connectors  
21  
         
c REMOTE (remote control signal) connector (D-  
sub 9-pin)  
menu item 831 “DV OUT AUDIO MODE” and extended  
menu item 828 “SDI/DV AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT.”  
To control the PDW-R1 from a controller or VTR  
supporting the RS-422A Sony 9-pin VTR protocol,  
connect the device to this connector.  
more information about how to make these settings.  
d REF VIDEO IN (reference video signal input)  
connector (BNC type)  
Input a reference video signal.  
Notes  
• If video or audio signals from an external device  
connected with the S400 (i.LINK) connector are not  
output, disconnect the i.LINK cable and connect it again,  
pushing it straight in.  
• When the PDW-R1 is connected to a device with a 6-pin  
i.LINK connector by an i.LINK cable, before  
unplugging the i.LINK cable, first power off the device  
and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. If the  
i.LINK cable is unplugged with the device power plug  
still connected, a current from an excessive voltage (8 to  
40 V) output from the i.LINK connector of the device  
flows into the PDW-R1. This may cause a failure of the  
PDW-R1.  
e
(network) connector (RJ-45 type)  
This is a 10Base-T/100Base-TX connector for network  
connection.  
To transfer files between an external device and the PDW-  
R1, connect a network cable to this connector and the  
external device.  
Caution  
For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral  
device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this  
port. Follow the instructions in this manual when making  
connections.  
• When connecting the PDW-R1 to a device with a 6-pin  
i.LINK connector, connect to the 6-pin i.LINK  
connector of the other device first.  
• Except in playback mode (jog and shuttle modes, etc.), if  
you are monitoring the audio signal output from this  
connector on another device, the audio signal may sound  
differently from the audio signal played back on the  
PDW-R1.  
ATTENTION  
Par mesure de sécurité, ne raccordez pas le connecteur  
pour le câblage de périphériques pouvant avoir une tension  
excessive à ce port. Suivez les instructions pour ce port.  
ACHTUNG  
1 Digital audio signal inputs/outputs  
Aus Sicherheitsgründen nicht mit einem Peripheriegerät-  
Anschluss verbinden, der zu starke Spannung für diese  
Buchse haben könnte. Folgen Sie den Anweisungen für  
diese Buchse.  
1 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) IN 1/2, 3/4 connectors  
2 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
OUT 1/2, 3/4 connectors  
f S400 (i.LINK) connector (6-pin, IEEE1394  
compliant)  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
OUT  
1/2  
3/4  
Connect a DV device, computer, or similar, using an  
i.LINK cable. To prevent the connector from coming  
loose, we recommend that you secure the cable in the cable  
clamp as shown in the following figure.  
a DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) IN (digital audio  
input) 1/2, 3/4 connectors (BNC type)  
These input AES/EBU format digital audio signals. The  
left connector (1/2) corresponds to audio channels 1 and 2,  
and the right connector (3/4) corresponds to audio  
channels 3 and 4.  
Cable clamp  
To i.LINK (IEEE 1394)  
connector of DV device or PC  
REMOTE  
REF VIDEO  
DC OUT 12V  
i.LINK cable  
(not supplied)  
b DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUT (digital audio  
output) 1/2, 3/4 connectors (BNC type)  
VIDEO  
OUT1  
S400  
IN  
OUT2(SUPER  
These output AES/EBU format digital audio signals.  
When the unit is shipped from the factory, the 1/2  
connector is set to audio channel 1/2, and the 3/4 connector  
is set to audio channel 3/4. You can change these settings  
with extended menu item 827 “AES/EBU AUDIO  
OUTPUT SELECT.”  
When the unit is shipped from the factory, the audio output  
signal is set to 16 bit/48 kHz/2ch mode. You can change  
the audio mode and output channel settings with extended  
22  
2-4 Connectors  
                   
To treat the input and output signals of these connectors as  
non-audio signals, set the maintenance menu item  
“AUDIO CONFIG”-“NON-AUDIO INPUT” (recording)  
and extended menu item 823 “NON-AUDIO FLAG PB”  
(playback).  
more information about how to make these settings.  
For details of the maintenace menu, see 7-4 “Maintenance  
more information about how to make extended menu  
settings.  
3 Analog video signal inputs/outputs  
for more information about how to make maintenance  
menu settings.  
1 VIDEO IN connector  
2 VIDEO OUT 1, OUT 2  
(SUPER) connectors  
VIDEO  
IN  
OUT1  
OUT2(SUPER)  
2 Analog audio signal inputs/outputs  
1 AUDIO IN 1/3, 2/4 connectors  
a VIDEO IN (analog video input) connector (BNC  
type)  
This inputs a composite video signal.  
AUDIO IN  
1/3  
2/4  
b VIDEO OUT 1, OUT 2 (SUPER) (analog video  
output 1, output 2 (superimpose)) connector (BNC  
type)  
AUDIO OUT  
1/3  
2/4  
These output composite video signals.  
The output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER) connector  
can have time code, menu settings, alarm messages, and  
other text information superimposed.  
2 AUDIO OUT 1/3, 2/4 connectors  
4 SDI signal inputs/outputs  
a AUDIO IN (analog audio signal input) 1/3, 2/4  
connectors (XLR 3-pin, female)  
These input analog audio signals.  
1 SDI IN connector  
With the AUDIO INPUT SEL button (see page 19), you  
can select whether the signal input to connector 1/3 is  
assigned to audio channel 1or 3, and whether the signal  
input to connector 2/4 is assigned to audio channel 2 or 4.  
You can set the reference input level with the maintenance  
menu item “AUDIO CONFIG.” (Factory default setting:  
+4 dB)  
2 SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector  
SDI  
IN  
OUT(SUPER)  
a SDI IN (SDI signal input) connector (BNC type)  
This inputs an SDI format video/audio signal.  
For details of the maintenace menu, see 7-4 “Maintenance  
b SDI OUT (SUPER) (SDI signal output  
(superimpose)) connector (BNC type)  
b AUDIO OUT (analog audio signal output) 1/3, 2/4  
connectors (XLR 3-pin, male)  
These output analog audio signals.  
This outputs an SDI format video/audio signal.  
When the unit is shipped from the factory, audio signal  
output is 8 channels with no switching, and RP188 time  
code output is set to on. You can change these settings with  
extended menu item 828 “SDI/DV AUDIO OUTPUT  
SELECT” and extended menu item 920 “SD-SDI H-ANC  
CONTROL.”  
The output can have time code, menu settings, alarm  
messages, and other text information superimposed. To  
turn superimposition off, set the maintenance menu item  
“OTHERS”-“SDI SUPER” to “OFF.”  
When the unit is shipped from the factory, the 1/3  
connector is set to audio channel 1, and the 2/4 connector  
is set to audio channel 2. You can change these settings  
with extended menu item 824 “ANALOG LINE OUTPUT  
SELECT.”  
You can set the output level with the maintenance menu  
item “AUDIO CONFIG.” (Factory default setting: +4 dB)  
Non-audio signals are muted.  
You can also output audio monitor signals by setting  
extended menu item 820 “AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/CH2  
SELECT” to “moni.”  
To treat the input and output signals of these connectors as  
non-audio signals, set the maintenance menu item  
2-4 Connectors  
23  
                       
“AUDIO CONFIG”-“NON-AUDIO INPUT” (recording)  
and extended menu item 823 “NON-AUDIO FLAG PB”  
(playback).  
more information about how to make extended menu  
settings.  
for more information about how to make maintenance  
menu settings.  
5 Time code inputs/outputs  
1 TC IN connector  
2 TC OUT connector  
TC  
IN  
OUT  
a TC IN connector (BNC type)  
This inputs an SMPTE time code generated by an external  
device.  
b TC OUT connector (BNC type)  
This outputs the following time code, depending on the  
operating state of the PDW-R1.  
During playback: playback time code  
During recording: the time code from the internal time  
code generator or the time code input to the TC IN  
connector.  
When extended menu item 611 “TC OUTPUT  
PHASE IN EE MODE” is set to “muting,” no time  
code is output.  
6 Power supply section  
DC IN  
12V  
1 DC IN 12V connector  
AC IN  
2 -AC IN connector  
a DC IN (DC power input) 12V connector (XLR  
type, 4-pin, male)  
Connect DC power to this connector.  
b -AC IN (AC power input) connector  
Connect to an AC power supply, using an optional power  
24  
2-4 Connectors  
               
Preparations  
3
Chapter  
3-1 Connections and Settings  
Note  
1, 2: 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)  
Production of some of the peripherals and related devices  
described in this chapter has been discontinued. For advice  
about choosing devices, please contact your Sony dealer or  
a Sony sales representative.  
PDW-R1  
3-1-1 Connecting an External  
Monitor  
Connecting a Sony LCD monitor to the VIDEO OUT 1,  
VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER), or SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector of this unit enables you to see the output video  
on the monitor screen.  
SDI OUT  
(SUPER)  
VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)  
To superimpose text information, for example, time code  
and alarm messages, use the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER) or  
SDI OUT (SUPER) connector. You can select the kind of  
text information to display using basic menu item 005  
“DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT.”  
1
2
To LINE A/B connector  
To SDI IN-1/IN-2 connector  
For detailed information about basic menu items and how  
to make menu settings, see 7-2 “Basic Setup Menu” on  
Connect a video monitor as example 1 or 2 shown in the  
following figure.  
LMD-9030 LCD monitor  
3-1-2 Connections for Using PDZ-1  
Proxy Browsing Software  
Using the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software, you  
can carry out simple editing with proxy AV data.  
For an overview of PDZ-1 and how to install the software,  
3-1 Connections and Settings  
25  
                         
Connecting three PDW-R1 units to a laptop computer via a  
LAN.  
For information about how to use the software, refer to the  
Help provided in the software.  
a)  
1: Network cable (not supplied)  
Using the (network) connector (FTP  
connection)  
The following shows an example of an FTP (File Transfer  
Protocol) connection.  
PDW-R1  
PDW-R1  
Note  
To use PDZ-1 requires the PDW-R1 IP address and other  
network-related settings to be made beforehand.  
(network) connector  
(network) connector  
PDW-R1  
For details of the network-related settings, see “To change  
1
Connecting this unit directly to a laptop computer  
1
a)  
1: Network cable (not supplied)  
1
LAN  
(network) connector  
AUDIO IN  
PDW-R1  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
1/3  
2/4  
REMOTE  
REF VIDEO IN  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
OUT  
1/2  
3/4  
DC OUT 12V  
1
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT1  
SDI  
TC  
1/3  
2/4  
S400  
IN  
OUT2(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT  
(network) connector  
To network connector  
Laptop computer  
Make sure the remote control switch (see page 12) is set to  
“NETWORK” on each of the three PDW-R1 units and extended  
menu item 257 “NETWORK ENABLE” is set to “net.”  
1
a) Use a straight cable.  
To network connector  
Using the S400 (i.LINK) connector (FAM  
connection)  
Laptop computer  
The following shows an example of a FAM (file access  
mode) connection.  
Make sure the remote control switch (see page 12) is set to  
“NETWORK” and extended menu item 257 “NETWORK  
ENABLE” is set to “net.”  
Note  
a) Use a cross cable.  
The PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software must be installed in  
advance.  
The required FAM driver is also installed when you install  
the PDZ-1 software.  
71) for more information about installing the PDZ-1  
software.  
Some limitations apply to FAM connections. For details,  
26  
3-1 Connections and Settings  
   
• Make the following settings before transferring video/  
audio signals (AV/C data) from this unit to a nonlinear  
editing system.  
1: i.LINK cable (not supplied)  
Audio mode selection  
Use extended menu item 831 “DV OUT AUDIO  
MODE” to select either of the following.  
4ch: 12 bit/32 kHz/4ch  
AUDIO IN  
PDW-R1  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
1/3  
2/4  
REMOTE  
REF VIDEO IN  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
OUT  
1/2  
3/4  
DC OUT 12V  
2ch: 16 bit/48 kHz/2ch (Factory default setting)  
Audio output channel selection  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT1  
SDI  
TC  
1/3  
2/4  
S400  
IN  
OUT2(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT  
Select the audio output channels with extended menu  
item 828 “SDI/DV AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT.”  
S400 (i.LINK)  
For information about how to make extended menu item  
1
1: i.LINK cable (not supplied)  
To i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
connector  
AUDIO IN  
PDW-R1  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
Laptop computer  
1/3  
2/4  
REMOTE  
REF VIDEO IN  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
OUT  
1/2  
3/4  
DC OUT 12V  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT1  
SDI  
TC  
Make sure extended menu item 215 “i.LINK MODE” is set to  
“FAM (PC REMOTE).”  
1/3  
2/4  
S400  
IN  
OUT2(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT  
S400 (i.LINK)  
3-1-3 Connecting to a Nonlinear  
Editing System  
1
You can send video/audio signals (AV/C data) from this  
unit to a nonlinear editing system connected to the S400  
(i.LINK) connector.  
The following figure shows an example connection.  
To i.LINK(IEEE1394)  
connector  
Notes  
Laptop computer  
(With editing software supporting  
DVCAM format installed)  
• The S400 (i.LINK) connector of this unit outputs  
video/audio signals in DVCAM format. Data recorded in  
MPEG IMX format is output after being converted into  
DVCAM format.  
• The nonlinear editing system to be used being connected  
to this unit requires editing software (not supplied)  
supporting DVCAM format.  
Make sure extended menu item 215 “i.LINK MODE” is set to  
“AV/C.”  
For the method of transferring video/audio signals (AV/C  
data) to a nonlinear editing system, refer to the manual  
provided with the editing software to be used.  
3-1-4 Connections for Recording in  
Parallel With a Camcorder  
You can start and stop recording on this unit at the same  
time that recording starts and stops on a camcorder. This  
allows you to make a backup recording of the video and  
audio shot by the camcorder. The following figure shows  
an example of the connections to make.  
3-1 Connections and Settings  
27  
         
1: i.LINK cable (not supplied)  
DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP  
(i.LINK) DV OUT  
PDW-R1  
1
I
S400 (i.LINK)  
DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP settings  
REC TRIGGER switch: INT ONLY  
“REC FORMAT” on the VTR MODE page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu: DVCAM  
PDW-R1 settings  
Remote control switch (see page 12): REMOTE  
VIDEO INPUT SEL button (see page 19): select i.LINK  
Basic menu item 031 “RECORDING FORMAT”: DVCAM  
Extended menu item 214 “REMOTE INTERFACE”: i.LINK  
Extended menu item 215 “i.LINK MODE”: AV/C  
Extended menu item 216 “PARALLEL RECORDING MODE”:  
on  
28  
3-1 Connections and Settings  
3-1-5 Connections for Cut Editing  
By connecting this unit to a VTR (for example, MSW-  
M2000/M2000P or DSR-2000/2000P) and an editing  
control unit, you can make up a cut editing system. Some  
example connections are shown in the following.  
When making the connections, also refer to the manuals  
provided with the equipment to be connected.  
See page 32 for more information about editing control  
unit settings.  
When using an editing control unit  
Cut editing system comprising this unit as a player, an  
MSW-M2000/M2000P unit as a recorder, and a BVE-700  
editing control unit.  
1: 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)  
2: 9-pin remote control cable (not supplied)  
a)  
3: Cable with XLR connectors (not supplied)  
Video monitor  
Video monitor  
To analog audio input connector  
To composite video input connector  
1
To composite video  
input connector  
3
1
1
1
REF. VIDEO  
INPUT  
SDI INPUT  
REF VIDEO  
IN  
VIDEO OUT 2  
(SUPER)  
AUDIO IN  
1/3  
2/4  
REMOTE  
REF VIDEO IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
3/4 OUT 1/2  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
DC OUT 12V  
AUDIO  
OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO  
SDI  
TC  
1/3  
2/4  
S400  
IN  
OUT1  
OUT2(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT  
SDI OUT (SUPER)  
(player)  
REMOTE  
PDW-R1  
REMOTE 1 IN (9P)  
COMPOSITE VIDEO  
OUTPUT 3 (SUPER)  
MSW-M2000/M2000P  
(recorder)  
2
2
RECORDER  
1
PLAYER-1  
AC IN  
BVE-700  
REF VIDEO IN  
Reference video signal  
PDW-R1 (player) settings  
MSW-M2000/M2000P (recorder) settings  
Remote control switch (see page 12): REMOTE  
REMOTE 1(9P) button: Lit  
Extended menu item 214 “REMOTE INTERFACE”: 9PIN  
Extended menu item 820 “AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/CH2 SELECT”:  
moni  
For details about the settings of the MSW-M2000/M2000P, refer  
to the operation manual for the unit.  
a) Use an XLR/pin converter plug (not supplied) as required.  
3-1 Connections and Settings  
29  
     
When using the editing functions of the recorder  
Connections using the REMOTE connector (D-sub 9-pin):  
Cut editing system comprising this unit as a player and an MSW-  
M2000/M2000P unit as a recorder. For cut editing, the system uses  
the editing functions of the recorder.  
1: 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)  
2: 9-pin remote control cable (not supplied)  
a)  
3: Cable with XLR connectors (not supplied)  
Video monitor  
Video monitor  
To analog audio input connector  
To composite video input connector  
1
3
To composite video  
input connector  
1
1
1
Reference video  
signal  
REF. VIDEO  
INPUT  
SDI INPUT  
VIDEO  
OUT 2  
REF VIDEO  
IN  
3/4  
AUDIO IN  
(SUPER)  
1/3  
2/4  
REMOTE  
REF VIDEO IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
OUT  
1/2  
DC OUT 12V  
AUDIO  
OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT1  
SDI  
TC  
1/3  
2/4  
S400  
IN  
OUT2(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT  
REMOTE  
SDI OUT (SUPER)  
PDW-R1 (player)  
REMOTE 1 OUT (9P)  
COMPOSITE VIDEO  
OUTPUT 3 (SUPER)  
MSW-M2000/M2000P  
(recorder)  
2
PDW-R1 (player) settings  
Remote control switch (see page 12): REMOTE  
MSW-M2000/M2000P (recorder) settings  
REMOTE 1(9P) button: Unlit  
Extended menu item 214 “REMOTE INTERFACE”: 9PIN  
Extended menu item 820 “AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/CH2 SELECT”:  
For details about the settings of the MSW-M2000/M2000P, refer  
to the operation manual for the unit.  
moni  
a) Use an XLR/pin converter plug (not supplied) as required.  
30  
3-1 Connections and Settings  
Connections using the S400 (i.LINK) connector:  
Cut editing system comprising this unit as a player and a DSR-  
2000/2000P unit as a recorder. For cut editing, the system uses  
the editing functions of the recorder. In this system, all signals  
such as the video/audio signals and control signals are  
transferred through the S400 (i.LINK) connector.  
1: 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)  
a)  
2: Cable with XLR connectors (not supplied)  
3: i.LINK cable (not supplied)  
Video monitor  
Video monitor  
To analog audio input connector  
To composite video  
input connector  
To composite video input  
connector  
1
2
3
1
i.LINK (optional DSBK-190)  
VIDEO OUT 2  
AUDIO IN  
(SUPER)  
1/3  
2/4  
REMOTE  
REF VIDEO IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
IN  
1/2  
3/4  
OUT  
1/2  
3/4  
DC OUT 12V  
AUDIO  
OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT1  
SDI  
TC  
1/3  
2/4  
S400  
IN  
OUT2(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT(SUPER)  
IN  
OUT  
S400 (i.LINK)  
(player)  
PDW-R1  
DSR-2000/2000P  
(recorder)  
VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER)  
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder) settings  
i.LINK button: Lit  
SDTI/i.LINK button: i.LINK  
PDW-R1 (player) settings  
Remote control switch (see page 12): REMOTE  
Extended menu item 214 “REMOTE INTERFACE”: i.LINK  
Extended menu item 820 “AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/CH2 SELECT”:  
moni  
For details about the settings of the DSR-2000/2000P, refer to the  
operating instructions for the unit.  
a) Use an XLR/pin converter plug (not supplied) as required.  
Setup menu item 11 “P ST DLY”: LEARN  
3-1-6 Using the RM-280 Editing  
Controller  
For settings on the recorder VTR, refer to the Operation  
Manual for the RM-280.  
You can connect an RM-280 Editing Controller to this unit  
and use it as an editor or as a remote controller.  
PDW-R1 settings  
Remote control switch (see page 12): REMOTE  
Extended menu item 214 “REMOTE INTERFACE”:  
9PIN  
Using the RM-280 as an editor  
You can perform assemble and insert editing by  
connecting this unit, a VTR, and an RM-280 Editing  
Controller.  
When configuring an editing system that includes this unit  
and another VTR, use this unit as the player (feeder).  
Note  
The RM-280 has not memorized the start delay of this unit.  
Before editing, have the RM-280 memorize the start delay  
of this unit. (Use the learn function of the RM-280.)  
For information about connections, refer to the Operation  
Manual for the RM-280.  
Using the RM-280 as a remote controller  
You can connect this unit to the RM-280 with an optional  
9-pin remote cable to perform editing operations such as  
thumbnail search, scene selection, and essence mark  
RM-280 settings  
EDITOR/REMOTE CONTROL switch: EDITOR  
3-1 Connections and Settings  
31  
   
recording from the RM-280 (when XDCAM mode is  
selected).  
Line  
mode  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RM-280 settings  
EDITOR/REMOTE CONTROL switch: REMOTE  
CONTROL  
525/60 OFF –  
625/50 OFF –  
OFF –  
OFF –  
Setup menu item 19 “FNC MODE”: XDCAM  
• Right switch  
For information about function assignments to PF keys in  
XDCAM mode, refer to the Operation Manual for the RM-  
280.  
Line  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
mode  
525/60 OFF –  
OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON  
OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON  
PDW-R1 settings  
625/50 ON  
Remote control switch (see page 12): REMOTE  
Extended menu item 214 “REMOTE INTERFACE”:  
9PIN  
PVE-500  
No settings required.  
3-1-7 Editing Control Unit Settings  
When connecting an editing control unit to use with this  
unit, make the following settings, depending on the editing  
control unit model.  
BVE-600/700/900/910/2000/9100  
Set VTR constants as follows.  
Line  
mode  
VTR CONSTANT 1  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
525/60 A0  
625/50 A1  
92  
92  
00  
00  
96  
7D  
05  
05  
05  
05  
03  
03  
80  
80  
Line  
mode  
VTR CONSTANT 2  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
525/60 0A  
625/50 0A  
07  
07  
FE  
FE  
00  
00  
80  
80  
5A  
4C  
FF  
FF  
5A  
4B  
FXE-100/120  
Set VTR constants as follows.  
Line  
mode  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
525/60 A0  
625/50 A1  
92  
92  
00  
00  
96  
05  
05  
05  
05  
03  
03  
80  
80  
7D  
Line  
mode  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
525/60 0A  
625/50 0A  
07  
07  
FE  
FE  
00  
00  
80  
80  
5A  
4C  
FF  
FF  
RM-450  
Set the DIP switches as follows.  
• Left switch  
32  
3-1 Connections and Settings  
 
To remove the battery pack  
Follow the above procedure in the reverse flow. After the  
battery pack is removed, replace the cover of the battery  
pack shoe.  
3-2Power Preparations  
This unit can be powered by a battery pack, DC power, or  
AC power.  
When several power sources are  
connected  
The following table shows the automatically selected  
power source that drives this unit.  
3-2-1 Using AC Power  
Connect an AC power source (100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60  
Hz) to the ~ AC IN connector on the right side of the unit  
with an AC power cord (not supplied, see page 133).  
Power types  
AC power  
Power that  
drives this  
unit  
DC power  
Battery pack  
a)  
Connected  
Connected  
Connected  
Connected  
Connected  
Mounted  
AC power  
AC power  
AC power  
DC power  
3-2-2 Using DC Power  
a)  
b)  
c)  
Connect a DC power source to the DC IN 12V connector  
on the right side of the unit.  
Mounted  
Mounted  
Connected  
a) Switches to DC power immediately if AC power supply is interrupted.  
b) Switches to battery pack power immediately if AC power supply is  
interrupted.  
3-2-3 Using a Battery Pack  
c) Does not switch to battery pack power, even if DC power supply is  
interrupted. To drive this unit from the battery pack, disconnect the DC  
power connector from the DC IN 12V connector.  
Usable battery packs  
The battery packs usable with this unit are as follows.  
BP-GL95, BP-GL65, BP-L80S, BP-L60S  
To attach a battery pack  
Proceed as follows.  
1
Remove the cover of the battery pack shoe.  
2
1
2
Fit the battery pack.  
3-2 Power Preparations  
33  
                     
3-3Setup  
3-4Setting the Date and  
Time  
When using this unit for the first time, you should set the  
date and time as follows.  
The principal setup operations before operating this unit  
can be carried out using setup menus.  
The setup menus of this unit comprise a basic setup menu  
and an extended setup menu. The contents of these menus  
are as follows.  
1
Basic setup menu:  
• Items relating to the hours meter  
• Items relating to operation  
• Items relating to menu banks  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
Extended setup menu:  
IN  
OUT  
• Items relating to control panels  
• Items relating to the remote control interface  
• Items relating to editing operations  
• Items relating to preroll  
• Items relating to disc protection  
• Items relating to the time code, metadata, and UMID  
• Items relating to video control  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
4 2,3  
3
1
2
Holding down the SHIFT button, press the MENU  
button.  
• Items relating to audio control  
• Items relating to digital processing  
The system menu appears on the video panel.  
For detailed information about the items, except for the  
basic menu items relating to the hours meter, of these  
menus and how to use them, see Chapter 7 “Menus” (page  
89). For detailed information about menu operations  
relating to the hours meter, see 8-1-1 “Digital Hours  
Select “DATE/TIME PRESET” using the F button or  
f button, then press the g button.  
The date and time setting screen appears on the  
monitor, allowing you to set the following items.  
• YEAR: Calendar year  
• MONTH: Month  
• DAY: Day  
• TIME: Time  
• TIME ZONE: Time zone (Difference from UTC)  
This unit allows four different sets of menu settings to be  
saved in what are termed “menu banks” numbered 1 to 4.  
Saved sets of menu settings can be recalled for use as  
required.  
3
4
Set the date, time and time zone.  
For more information about the menu banks, see “Menu  
the description of maintenance menu item “SETUP  
MAINTENANCE” — “SETUP BANK4” (page 113).  
You can change the setting of the flashing digits.  
To change the flashing digits  
Use the arrow buttons (G, g).  
To increase or decrease the values of the flashing  
digits  
Use the arrow buttons (F, f) or jog dial.  
Press the SET button.  
The date, time and time zone settings are stored.  
To return to the previous menu page  
Press the MENU button.  
To exit the menu  
Press the MENU button twice in succession.  
34  
3-3 Setup / 3-4 Setting the Date and Time  
       
Note  
The time zone is reset to the factory default when you  
execute the maintenance menu item “RESET ALL  
SETUP.” You will need to set it again. The date and time  
are not reset.  
3-5Superimposed Text  
Information  
The video signal output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)  
connector or the SDI OUT (SUPER) connector contains  
superimposed text information, including time code, menu  
settings, and alarm messages.  
Adjusting the text display  
You can adjust the position, size and type of the  
superimposed text using basic menu items 002, 003, 005,  
009, 011, and 012.  
Information displayed  
1Type of time data  
2Time code reader drop frame  
mark (for 525 line mode only)  
3Time code generator drop  
frame mark (for 525 line  
mode only)  
Time data  
4VITC field mark  
T C R  
B 1  
0 0  
:
0 4  
.
4 7  
.
0 7 *  
P L A Y  
L O C K  
7Playback condition  
mark  
6Operation mode  
5Menu setting states  
Note  
The display shown above corresponds to the factory  
default settings of the unit. You can change the type of  
information to be displayed in the lower line of the display  
by changing the setting of basic menu item 005  
“DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT.”  
3-5 Superimposed Text Information  
35  
         
a Type of time data  
• Block B displays the servo lock status or playback speed.  
Display  
CNT  
TCR  
UBR  
TCR.  
UBR.  
TCG  
UBG  
IN  
Meaning  
Counter data  
TC reader time code data  
TC reader user bits data  
VITC reader time code  
VITC reader user bits data  
TC generator time code  
TC generator user bits data  
IN point time data  
A
B
Display  
Operation mode  
OUT  
DUR  
OUT point time data  
Block A  
Block B  
Duration between IN point and OUT  
point  
DISC OUT  
LOADING  
UNLOADING  
STANDBY OFF  
STOP  
Disc is not loaded.  
Disc is being loaded.  
Disc is being unloaded.  
Standby off mode  
Stop mode  
Note  
If the time data or user’s bits cannot be read correctly,  
they will be displayed with an asterisk. For example,  
“T*R”, “U*R”, “T*R.” or “U*R.”.  
NEXT  
Cuing up to the first frame of the  
next clip.  
b Time code reader drop frame mark (for 525 line  
mode only)  
“.”: Indicates drop frame mode  
PREV  
Cuing up to the first frame of the  
current clip.  
“:”: Indicates non-drop-frame mode  
F.FWD  
F.REV  
PLAY  
Fast forward search  
Fast reverse search  
c Time code generator drop frame mark (for 525 line  
mode only)  
“.”: Indicates drop frame mode (factory default setting)  
Playback mode (servo unlocked)  
Playback mode (servo locked)  
Record mode (servo unlocked)  
Record mode (servo locked)  
A still picture in jog mode  
Jog mode in forward direction  
Jog mode in reverse direction  
A still picture in shuttle mode  
PLAY  
LOCK  
“:”: Indicates non-drop-frame mode  
REC  
REC  
LOCK  
STILL  
FWD  
REV  
d VITC field mark  
“ ” (blank): Fields 1 and 3 (for 525/60 mode) or fields 1, 3,  
5 and 7 (for 625/50 mode)  
“ * ”: Fields 2 and 4 (for 525/60 mode) or fields 2, 4, 6 and  
8 (for 625/50 mode)  
JOG  
JOG  
JOG  
SHUTTLE  
SHUTTLE  
TOP 001/xxx  
STILL  
(Speed) Shuttle mode  
e Menu setting states  
Cuing up to the first frame of the  
first clip.  
Display  
Description  
B1  
The current menu settings are the same as  
the settings in menu bank 1.  
END xxx/xxx  
PREROLL  
Cuing up to the last frame of the  
last clip.  
B2  
The current menu settings are the same as  
the settings in menu bank 2.  
Cuing up during thumbnail search  
g Playback condition mark  
B3  
The current menu settings are the same as  
the settings in menu bank 3.  
One of three channel condition marks is displayed when  
the ACCESS indicator is lit during any mode except  
recording. The three channel condition marks indicate the  
following three stages.  
B4  
The current menu settings are the same as  
the settings in menu bank 4.  
DF  
The current menu settings are the same as  
the factory defaults.  
No display  
The current menu settings are different from  
all of the above.  
f Operation mode  
The field is divided into two blocks as shown below.  
• Block A displays the operation mode.  
36  
3-5 Superimposed Text Information  
                   
• Deteriorating laser diodes performance  
The performance of the laser diodes used in optical  
heads can worsen with age, leading to deteriorating  
playback conditions.  
You can use the digital clock to check the total optical  
output time of optical heads.  
Display  
Name  
Description  
Green condition There is no problem with the  
playback condition. This unit  
and the disc can be used just  
as they are. This  
corresponds to the “green”  
channel condition indicator of  
a VTR.  
about this setting.  
Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate  
guide to when it is time to replace optical heads.  
Yellow condition The playback condition has  
deteriorated to some degree.  
There are no read errors, but  
you should take the action  
described in the next section.  
This corresponds to the  
To prevent playback conditions from  
deteriorating  
Pay attention to the following points when handling discs.  
• Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with  
your hands.  
• Do not store for long periods in locations which are  
dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans.  
• Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or  
in locations exposed to direct sunlight.  
“yellow” channel condition  
indicator of a VTR.  
Red condition  
The playback condition has  
deteriorated. There are no  
a)  
read errors, but you should  
take the action described in  
the next section. This  
corresponds to the “red”  
channel condition indicator of  
a VTR.  
If playback conditions have deteriorated  
If a yellow or red playback condition mark appears, check  
the following points.  
a) Read errors will occur if the playback condition continues to deteriorate.  
If a read error occurs, a “Disc Error!” alarm appears in the time data  
display, the picture freezes, and audio is muted.  
Whether the disc displays the same playback condition  
on other XDCAM devices: If so, the surface of the  
disc may be dirty or scratched, or the performance of  
the recording layers on the disc may have worsened  
due to age. Do not use discs with these symptoms.  
Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device  
displays the same playback conditions: If so, the  
performance of the laser diodes may have deteriorated.  
Check the total optical output time.  
To display playback condition marks, set basic menu item  
012 “CONDITION DISPLAY ON VIDEO MONITOR”  
to “ena,” and set basic menu item 005 “DISPLAY  
INFORMATION SELECT” to “T&sta.”  
For details about operation, see 7-2-2 “Basic Menu  
Playback condition displays  
You can be alerted in advance to deteriorating playback  
conditions and to error correction rates which are  
approaching their limits.  
Deteriorating playback may be due to the following  
causes.  
• Scratches and dust on the disc surface  
This includes fingerprints, dust from the air, tar from  
cigarette smoke, and so on.  
Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are  
not a problem because they are registered in advance as  
defects, and recording avoids them. However, scratches  
and soiling which occur after recording can lead to  
deteriorating playback conditions.  
• Aging of disc recording layers  
Over several decades, the recording layers of optical  
discs can age and cause deteriorating playback  
conditions.  
You can use this function to check archival discs and  
other discs which have been stored for extended periods,  
so that you can take action before the deterioration  
progresses further.  
3-5 Superimposed Text Information  
37  
 
the disc in the direction of the arrow, as shown in the  
following figure.  
3-6Handling Discs  
Lower surface of the disc  
Write Inhibit tab  
3-6-1 Discs Used for Recording and  
Playback  
This disc recorder uses the following disc for recording  
1)  
and playback: PFD23 Professional Disc (capacity 23.3  
GB)  
E
V
A
S
1) Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
Note  
It is not possible to use the following discs for recording or  
Slide in the direction of the arrow  
playback:  
• Blu-ray Disc  
Write Inhibit tab settings  
SAVE  
SAVE  
• Professional Disc for Data  
Recording enabled  
Recording disabled  
3-6-2 Notes on Handling  
You can lock individual clips to prevent them from being  
Handling  
The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge, and is  
designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or  
fingerprints. However, if the cartridge is subjected to a  
severe shock, for example by dropping it, this can result in  
damage or scratching of the disc. If the disc is scratched, it  
may be impossible to record video/audio, or to play back  
the content recorded on the disc. The discs should be  
handled and stored carefully.  
• Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the  
cartridge.  
• Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage.  
• Do not disassemble the cartridge.  
3-6-4 Loading and Unloading a Disc  
When the on/standby switch indicator is lit green, you can  
load and unload a disc as shown in the following figure.  
On/standby switch and  
indicator  
To unload  
Press the EJECT button.  
• The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for  
indexing discs. Apply the label in the correct position.  
Storage  
• Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct  
sunlight, or in other places where the temperature or  
humidity is high.  
I
• Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able to gain  
ingress.  
• Store cartridges in their cases.  
To load  
Insert a disc face up.  
The disc is drawn in.  
Care of the discs  
• Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using  
a soft dry cloth.  
• If condensation forms, allow ample time to dry before  
use.  
The disc loaded mark  
(see page 19) flashes while the  
disc is being inserted, and while it is being ejected. Lights  
when loading finishes, and goes out when eject finishes.  
Recording stops and the disc is ejected if you press the  
EJECT button during recording. If you do not want recording  
to stop with the EJECT button, set extended menu item 145  
“MODE KEY ENABLE DURING RECORDING” to “stop.”  
3-6-3 Write-Protecting Discs  
To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental  
erasure, move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of  
38  
3-6 Handling Discs  
                       
If message “HUMID!” appears in the time data  
display  
There is moisture condensation in the unit.  
6
Press the MENU button.  
This exits the menu.  
To format several discs in succession  
For the steps to take when the message appears, see 8-2  
1
2
Carry out steps 1 to 5 in the previous procedure, and  
then press the EJECT button to eject the disc.  
3-6-5 Formatting a Disc  
Insert the next disc that you want to format.  
An unused disc requires no formatting operation. The disc  
is automatically formatted when loaded into this unit.  
To format a recorded disc, load the disc into the unit, then  
proceed as follows.  
The message “QUICK FORMAT OK?” appears.  
3
4
Press the SET button.  
When the message “FORMAT COMPLETED.”  
appears, press the EJECT button to eject the disc.  
Note  
When a recorded disc is formatted, all the data on the disc  
is erased. (Locked clips (see page 55) are also erased.)  
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 for all of the discs that you want to  
format.  
6 1  
3-6-6 To Eject Discs With the Unit  
Powered Off  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
When battery power is low and at other times, it may not  
be possible to eject discs by pressing the EJECT button. In  
these situations, you can use the following as an  
emergency procedure to eject a disc manually.  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
AUDIO  
MARK1  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
1
2
Power the unit off.  
5 2,3,4  
Open the rubber cover and, using a Phillips  
screwdriver, rotate the red screw in the  
counterclockwise direction.  
1
2
3
4
Holding down the SHIFT button, press the MENU  
button.  
The system menu appears on the monitor screen.  
Select “DISC MENU” using the F button or f button,  
then press the g button.  
The menu item “FORMAT” is displayed.  
Select “FORMAT” using the F button or f button,  
then press the g button.  
The menu item “QUICK FORMAT” is selected.  
Press the g button.  
The message “QUICK FORMAT OK?” appears.  
To return to the previous menu page without  
formatting the disc  
Press the RESET button.  
5
Press the SET button.  
Formatting is completed and the message “FORMAT  
COMPLETED.” appears.  
3-6 Handling Discs  
39  
         
Notes  
• Do not turn this unit’s primary power off until recording  
processing has finished and the ACCESS indicator has  
gone out.  
• This function salvages as much recorded material as  
possible after an unforeseen accident, but 100%  
restoration cannot be guaranteed.  
• Even when this function is used, it is not possible to  
recover data from immediately before the interruption of  
recording. The amount of data lost is as follows.  
- Quick salvage: From 2 to 4 seconds of data before the  
interruption of recording.  
- Full salvage: From 4 to 6 seconds of data before the  
interruption of recording.  
Quick salvage  
When the unit is powered on again after a recording  
interruption due to power off, with the disc still loaded in  
the unit, clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data  
stored in nonvolatile memory and markers recorded on the  
disc.  
Processing time is about 5 seconds.  
Full salvage  
When a disc that was manually ejected from a device  
subjected to a recording interruption due to power off is  
loaded into this unit, clips are reconstructed on the basis of  
markers recorded on the disc. Nonvolatile memory cannot  
be used, so processing takes longer than for a quick  
salvage (about 30 seconds, although it depends on the state  
of the disc).  
The disc is ejected.  
After removing the disc, you do not need to return the  
screw to its original position. Normal operation will  
resume when the unit is powered on again.  
3
Close the rubber cover firmly.  
Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage.  
3-6-7 Handling of Discs When  
Recording Does Not End  
1
2
Insert the disc on which recording did not end  
normally.  
Normally (Salvage Function)  
The message “Salvage ?” appears.  
Do one of the following.  
Recording processing does not end normally when the  
1)  
primary power of this unit is lost during recording.  
Because the file system is not updated, video and audio  
data recorded in real time is not recognized as files and clip  
contents recorded up to that point are lost.  
However, this unit has a salvage function which can hold  
losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such  
discs.  
Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the on/  
standby switch on the control panel is set to standby,  
because the unit does not enter standby mode until after the  
end of recording processing.  
To salvage  
Press the SET button.  
Processing begins and the message “Executing.”  
appears.  
Notes  
• If the REC INHI indicator (see page 18) is lit, the  
message “EJECT?” appears. Eject the disc, set the  
Write Inhibit tab to the recording enable position,  
and insert the disc again.  
• This operation cannot be cancelled once it begins.  
1) Primary power is lost when the AC power switch on the rear panel is  
turned off, the AC power cord is disconnected, DC power is turned off, the  
battery pack is exhausted, the battery pack is removed, and so on.  
The message “Complete” appears when processing  
finishes. If the message reads “Incomplete!,” the clips  
that failed were lost.  
40  
3-6 Handling Discs  
     
To exit without salvaging  
Press the RESET button.  
The state of section where recording was interrupted is  
saved, but no salvage processing is done.  
Sections which were recorded normally can be played  
back, but no new recording can be done on the disc. (A  
quick format can be done on the disc, although all of  
its contents will be lost.)  
Note  
Unless clips are salvaged, the message “Salvage ?”  
appears again the next time the disc is inserted or the  
unit is powered on.  
3-6 Handling Discs  
41  
Recording/Playback  
4
Chapter  
b Remote control switch (page 12)  
Set to LOCAL.  
4-1Recording  
c On/standby switch (page 12)  
Indicator (`) lit green.  
This section describes video and audio recording on the  
unit.  
d VARIABLE switch (page 15) and ALL/CH-1, CH-  
2 to CH-4 adjustment knobs (page 15)  
Adjust the audio recording levels (page 43).  
4-1-1 Preparations for Recording  
e AUDIO MONITOR SEL button (page 15)  
Select the audio channels to monitor.  
Button/switch settings  
Before beginning recording, make any necessary button/  
switch settings.  
f AC power switch (rear panel) (page 11)  
Set to the ` (on) position.  
If you are using DC power or a battery pack, connect the  
DC power or mount the battery pack on the battery pack  
shoe before recording.  
For details of the settings of the buttons/switches, see the  
pages indicated in parenthesis.  
g VIDEO INPUT SEL button (page 19)  
Select the input video signal.  
6
h COUNTER SEL button (page 13)  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
Select the data (elapsed recording time, time code value or  
user bit data) to show in the time data display. When  
displaying the time code value, select TC or VITC with  
extended menu item 629 “TC SELECT.”  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
CH  
-
15 CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
STATUS CHARACTER  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
1
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
7
8
2
3
Setting the recording format  
Before recording, it is necessary to set the recording format  
for each of video and audio.  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
SEL  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
4
5
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
Note  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
It is not possible to combine different recording formats on  
a single disc. When the format of previously recorded  
sections on the disc does not match the current recording  
format of this unit, the disc is record inhibited and the REC  
INHI lights.  
MARK2  
a AUDIO INPUT CH button (page 19) and AUDIO  
INPUT SEL button (page 19)  
Select the input audio signal.  
42  
4-1 Recording  
             
To set the video recording format  
To adjust the audio recording levels  
Use basic menu item 031 “RECORDING FORMAT” to  
select the video recording format from MPEG IMX 50  
Mbps, MPEG IMX 40 Mbps, MPEG IMX 30 Mbps, and  
DVCAM.  
When carrying out audio recording at a reference  
level  
Set the VARIABLE switch (see page 15) to PRESET. The  
audio signals will be recorded at a preset reference level.  
Use the maintenance menu item “AUDIO CONFIG” to set  
the audio input level and reference level.  
The factory default setting is IMX50.  
For details of the basic menu operations, see 7-2-2 “Basic  
For details of the maintenance menu operations, see 7-4-2  
To set the audio recording format  
When using the MPEG IMX 50Mbps/40Mbps/30Mbps  
for video: Use the maintenance menu item “AUDIO  
CONFIG” to select 16 bits/8 channels or 24 bits/4  
channels.  
The factory default setting is 16 bits/8 channels.  
When using the DVCAM format for video: Selection is  
not necessary. The format of 16 bits/4 channels is  
selected automatically.  
Manually adjusting the audio recording  
levels  
Set the VARIABLE switch (see page 15) to REC and  
adjust the ALL/CH-1 and CH-2 to CH-4 adjustment knobs  
so that the audio level indications on the audio level meters  
(see page 18) do not exceed 0 dB for a maximum volume.  
Carry out the adjustment in E-E mode.  
To select the E-E mode, see extended menu item 108  
“AUTO EE SELECT.”  
For details of the maintenance menu operations, see 7-4-2  
To adjust the audio recording levels for channels 1 to 8  
simultaneously, set extended menu item 131 “AUDIO  
VOLUME” to “all” and turn the ALL/CH-1 adjustment  
knob.  
File writing formats with FAM and FTP  
connections  
It is not necessary to set the video recording format  
(IMX50/IMX40/IMX30/DVCAM) and the audio  
recording format (16bit × 8ch/24bit × 4ch) before writing  
files.  
The file formats which can be written to the disc depend on  
whether clips are already recorded on the disc.  
When you insert a disc with no recorded clips: Files in  
all of the above formats can be written.  
When you insert a disc with recorded clips: Files in the  
same video and audio formats as the clips on the disc  
can be written.  
Making thumbnail image settings  
As required, you can select which frame to display as a  
clip’s thumbnail image. (When the unit is shipped from the  
factory, it is set up to display the first frame as the  
thumbnail.)  
For example, if all clips have the same image in their first  
frames, you can specify a frame a few seconds after the  
start of the clip, so that thumbnails will not all show the  
same image.  
To specify the frame to use as the thumbnail  
image  
Set extended menu item 143 “INDEX PICTURE  
POSITION” to a number in the range from 0 to 10, in units  
of 1 second.  
more information about how to make extended menu  
settings.  
4-1 Recording  
43  
             
4-1-2 Recording Time Code and User Bit Values  
There are the following four ways of recording time code:  
• Internal Preset mode, which records the output of the  
internal time code generator, set beforehand to an initial  
value. The following run modes can be selected.  
- Free Run: Time code advances continually.  
- Rec Run: Time code advances only during recording.  
• Internal Regen mode, which records the output of the  
internal time code generator, initialized to time code  
following continuously upon the time code of the last  
frame of the last clip on the disc.  
-
S400 (i.LINK) connector: TC or VITC  
- SDI IN connector: SMPTE RP188 LTC  
• External Preset mode, which directly records the input of  
an external time code generator. As the external input,  
the time code input to any of the following connectors  
can be selected.  
- TIME CODE IN connector: TC  
-
- SDI IN connector: SMPTE RP188 LTC  
S400 (i.LINK) connector: TC  
• External Regen mode, which records the output of the  
internal time code generator, synchronized to an external  
time code generator. As the external input, the time code  
input to any of the following connectors can be selected.  
- TIME CODE IN connector: LTC  
As shown in the following table, you can switch between  
different time code recording modes by combining switch  
settings in the time data settings section with the selection  
of a video input signal and settings of extended menu item  
629.  
- VIDEO IN connector: VITC  
Time code recording mode  
Time data settings section switch  
VIDEO INPUT  
SEL button  
Item  
629  
Reference  
INT/EXT/  
RP188  
PRESET/  
REGEN  
F-RUN/  
R-RUN  
“To record time code  
Internal Preset Free Run  
Internal Preset Rec Run  
INT  
PRESET  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
“To record time code  
upon the last recorded  
Internal Regen  
INT  
REGEN  
“To record with the  
internal time code  
to external time code”  
External Regen (TC IN connector: EXT  
LTC)  
REGEN  
SDI/  
COMPOSITE/  
SG  
tc  
External Regen (VIDEO IN  
connector: VITC)  
vitc  
tc  
External Regen (i.LINK connector:  
TC)  
i.LINK  
External Regen (i.LINK connector:  
VITC)  
vitc  
External Regen (SDI IN  
connector: SMPTE RP188 LTC)  
RP188  
REGEN  
SDI  
External Preset (TC IN connector: EXT  
TC)  
PRESET  
SDI/  
COMPOSITE/  
SG  
External Preset (i.LINK connector:  
TC)  
i.LINK  
External Preset (SDI IN  
RP188  
PRESET  
SDI  
connector: SMPTE RP188 LTC)  
Then set an initial value as described below, and carry out  
recording (see page 48).  
To record time code after setting an initial  
value  
Set the following switches beforehand.  
• INT/EXT/RP188 switch: INT  
To set an initial value  
Proceed as follows.  
• PRESET/REGEN switch: PRESET  
• F-RUN/R-RUN switch: F-RUN or R-RUN  
more information about how to make extended menu  
settings.  
44  
4-1 Recording  
               
• If the F-RUN/R-RUN switch is set to F-RUN, the  
time code starts advancing from the initial value  
immediately.  
Time data display  
To set time code to the time of the internal clock  
You can record time code synchronized to the time of the  
internal clock.  
To do so, set the INT/EXT/RP188 switch to INT, set the  
PRESET/REGEN switch to PRESET, and then proceed as  
follows.  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
CH-  
15 CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
STATUS CHARACTER  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the previous section, “To  
record time code after setting an initial value.”  
SHUTTLE button  
1 2  
4
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
With the SHUTTLE button held down, rotate the jog  
dial in the counterclockwise direction. Stop rotating  
when “CLOCK” appears in the time data display and  
the video panel.  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
SEL  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
3
Press the SET button.  
To set user bits  
You can record up to eight hexadecimal digits of  
information (date, time, clip name, etc.) in the time code  
track.  
6
3,4  
RESET button  
Proceed as follows.  
1
2
Watching the indicators above the time data display,  
press the COUNTER SEL button to select TC.  
Time data display  
Press the HOLD button.  
The SHUTTLE button lights and the first two digits of  
the time code shown in the time data display start  
flashing.  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
CH-  
15 CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
STATUS CHARACTER  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
To set all digits to 0  
Press the RESET button.  
1
3
4
Select the digits to set by rotating the shuttle dial or jog  
dial.  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
SEL  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
The flashing digits change to the next two digits on the  
right when you rotate the shuttle dial or jog dial  
clockwise, and to the next two digits on the left when  
you rotate it counterclockwise.  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
Set the value for the flashing digits by rotating the  
shuttle dial or jog dial while holding the SHUTTLE  
button.  
1
2
Watching the indicators above the time data display,  
press the COUNTER SEL button to select UB.  
5
6
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you finish setting all digits.  
Carry out steps 2 to 6 of the section “To set an initial  
Press the SET button.  
Settings are made in hexadecimal (0, 1, 2,... 8, 9, A,  
B,... E, F).  
• An initial time code value is set and the monitor  
returns to the time code display before the HOLD  
button was pressed in step 2.  
4-1 Recording  
45  
 
To record time code that follows  
sequentially upon the last recorded time  
code  
Time data display  
Video panel  
You can record time code so that it is continuous from one  
clip to the next on the disc.  
Set the INT/EXT/RP188 switch to INT and the PRESET/  
REGEN switch to REGEN beforehand. When this setting  
is in force, the unit reads the time code of the last frame of  
the last recorded clip on the disc before starting to record,  
and internally generates time code that follows upon the  
recorded time code.  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
CH-  
15 CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
STATUS CHARACTER  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
In this case, the setting of extended menu item 628 “DF  
MODE” is ignored. New time code is recorded in the drop-  
frame mode of the last recorded time code on the disc.  
1
2
SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
TC  
PRESET  
SEL  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
To record with the internal time code  
generator synchronized to external time  
code  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
AUDIO  
MARK1  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
You can record with the internal time code generator  
synchronized to time code input from an external device.  
Use this method to synchronize the time code generators of  
a number of recorders, or to carry out recording  
maintaining the synchronization between the source video  
and time code.  
1
Make either of the following connections and settings.  
To synchronize to time code input to the TC IN  
connector  
In this case, the settings of the F-RUN/R-RUN switch and  
extended menu item 628 “DF MODE” are ignored.  
You can synchronize the internal time code generator to  
one of the following external time codes.  
• TC input to this unit’s TC IN connector  
• VITC in a video signal input to this unit  
• SMPTE RP188 LTC in an SDI signal input to this unit  
• i.LINK TC input to this unit’s S400 (i.LINK)  
connector  
Connect the time code output from the external device  
to the TC IN connector. Press the VIDEO INPUT SEL  
button and, while viewing the time data display or the  
video panel, select one of SDI, COMPOSITE, or SG.  
To synchronize to VITC in an input video signal  
Connect a video signal containing VITC to the VIDEO  
IN connector or the SDI IN connector. Press the  
VIDEO INPUT SEL button and, while viewing the  
time data display or the video panel, select  
COMPOSITE or SDI.  
• i.LINK VITC input to this unit’s S400 (i.LINK)  
connector  
Use the following procedure to synchronize the internal  
time code generator according to the type of external time  
code.  
To synchronize to SMPTE RP188 LTC in an SDI  
signal  
Connect an SDI signal containing SMPTE RP188  
LTC to the SDI IN connector.  
To synchronize to i.LINK TC  
Connect an i.LINK signal to the S400 (i.LINK)  
connector. Press the VIDEO INPUT SEL button and,  
while viewing the time data display or the video panel,  
select i.LINK.  
To synchronize to i.LINK VITC  
Connect an i.LINK signal to the S400 (i.LINK)  
connector. Press the VIDEO INPUT SEL button and,  
while viewing the time data display or the video panel,  
select i.LINK.  
2
Make the following settings.  
46  
4-1 Recording  
   
To synchronize to time code input to the TC IN  
connector  
Check that the time code value shown in the time data  
display coincides with the external time code value.  
• Set the INT/EXT/RP188 switch to EXT and the  
PRESET/REGEN switch to REGEN.  
• Set extended menu item 629 “TC SELECT” to “tc.”  
To record external time code directly  
You can record both of the following types of external time  
code directly.  
• TC input to the TC IN connector of this unit  
• i.LINK TC input to the S400 (i.LINK) connector of  
this unit  
• SMPTE RP-188 LTC in an SDI signal input to the SDI  
IN connector of this unit  
To synchronize to VITC in an input video signal  
• Set the INT/EXT/RP188 switch to EXT and the  
PRESET/REGEN switch to REGEN.  
• Set extended menu item 629 “TC SELECT” to  
“vitc.”  
To synchronize to SMPTE RP188 LTC in an SDI  
signal  
Set the INT/EXT/RP188 switch to RP188 and the  
When you use this method, the internal time code  
generator advances without being affected by the external  
time code.  
To record the playback time code of external VTRs, the  
methods described above in “To record with the internal  
time code generator synchronized to external time code”  
are recommended.  
PRESET/REGEN switch to REGEN.  
To synchronize to i.LINK TC  
• Set the INT/EXT/RP188 switch to EXT and the  
PRESET/REGEN switch to REGEN.  
• Set extended menu item 629 “TC SELECT” to “tc.”  
Use the following procedure to record external time code  
directly, according to the type of external time code.  
To synchronize to i.LINK VITC  
• Set the INT/EXT/RP188 switch to EXT and the  
PRESET/REGEN switch to REGEN.  
• Set extended menu item 629 “TC SELECT” to  
“vitc.”  
Time data display  
Video panel  
For details of menu setting operations, see Chapter 7  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
CH  
-
15 CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
This starts the internal time code generator running in  
synchronization with the external time code generator.  
Once the internal time code generator is synchronized  
with the external time code generator, even if the  
external time code generator connection is removed,  
the internal time code generator continues to run.  
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
STATUS CHARACTER  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
1
2
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
SEL  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
Notes  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
• When the input video signal selected is i.LINK or SDI,  
setting the INT/EXT/RP188 switch to EXT and the  
PRESET/REGEN switch to REGEN automatically  
synchronizes the internal time code generator to the time  
code received through the S400 (i.LINK) connector or  
SDI IN connector.  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
1
Make either of the following connections and settings.  
• When the INT/EXT/RP188 switch is set to EXT and the  
PRESET/REGEN switch is set to REGEN, the internal  
time code advance mode and frame count mode (for 525  
line mode only) are automatically set as follows.  
Advance mode: free running  
Frame count mode (for 525 line mode only): the same  
as the external time code signal (drop frame or non-  
drop frame)  
To directly record TC input to the TC IN connector  
Connect the time code output from the external device  
to the TC IN connector. Press the VIDEO INPUT SEL  
button and, while viewing the time data display or the  
video panel, select one of SDI, COMPOSITE, or SG.  
To directly record i.LINK TC  
Connect an i.LINK signal to the S400 (i.LINK)  
connector. Press the VIDEO INPUT SEL button and,  
while viewing the time data display or the video panel,  
select i.LINK.  
To check the synchronization to the external  
signal  
Press the STOP button to stop this unit, then press the REC  
button.  
4-1 Recording  
47  
 
To directly record SMPTE RP-188 LTC in an SDI  
signal  
Connect an SDI signal containing SMPTE RP188  
LTC to the SDI IN connector. Press the VIDEO  
INPUT SEL button and, while viewing the time data  
display or the video panel, select SDI.  
• Do not allow the unit’s primary power to be lost during  
recording. This could cause the clip being recorded to  
40.)  
1)  
1) Primary power is lost when the AC power switch on the rear panel is  
turned off, the AC power cord is disconnected, DC power is turned off, the  
battery pack is exhausted, the battery pack is removed, and so on.  
2
Set the PRESET/REGEN switch to PRESET, and set  
the INT/EXT/RP188 to one of the following.  
To record TC input to the TC IN connector, or  
i.LINK TC: EXT  
To record SMPTE RP188 LTC: RP188  
To record essence marks  
A shot mark 1 essence mark or shot mark 2 essence mark  
is recorded if you hold down the F/MARK1 or f/MARK2  
button and press the SET button during recording.  
For details of menu setting operations, see Chapter 7  
4-1-4 Auto Clip List Recording for  
Automatic Inclusion of  
4-1-3 Recording Operation  
Recorded Clips in Clip Lists  
To record, proceed as follows.  
Auto clip list recording is a function for automatically  
including the clips generated by recording operations in a  
selected clip list. The updated clip list is saved to the disc.  
Proceed as follows.  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
1
2
Insert a disc.  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
Load a clip list from the disc.  
• To create a new clip list, load a NEW FILE (empty)  
clip list.  
2 3  
• To add clips to an existing clip list, load that clip list.  
1
Insert a disc.  
3
4
Press the SUBCLIP button, turning it on.  
2
3
Hold down the REC button, and press the PLAY  
button.  
The unit enters auto clip list recording mode, and the  
number of the clip list which is loaded in the current  
clip list appears.  
Recording starts.  
To stop recording, press the STOP button.  
Press the REC button to start recording.  
A clip is generated automatically from the video and  
audio recorded in the interval from start to stop of  
recording, and added as a sub clip to the current clip  
list. When recording stops, the updated clip list is  
written to disc.  
If the disc becomes full  
Recording stops and the message “ALARM DISC END.”  
appears on the video panel.  
Notes  
5
Repeat the process of recording and stopping until you  
have included all the required clips.  
To change the registered clip list, repeat step 2 to load  
the desired clip list.  
• The shortest clip that can be recorded is 2 seconds long.  
Even if recording start and stop operations are performed  
within 2 seconds, a 2-second clip is recorded.  
• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded is  
300. If the loaded disc already contains 300 clips,  
recording with the REC button is not possible. (The  
message “Disc Full!” appears in the time data display.)  
To exit auto clip list recording mode  
Press the SUBCLIP button, turning it off.  
48  
4-1 Recording  
           
5
4-2Playback  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
This section describes playback of video and audio.  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
CH  
-
15 CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
STATUS CHARACTER  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
Disc playback start position  
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
Although this unit uses optical discs, it is designed to offer  
the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs.  
One of these is the playback start position, which works in  
the same way as tape, as described below.  
1
2
6
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
SEL  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
After playback stop  
The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was  
3
4
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
pressed.  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
Press the PLAY button to resume playback at the stop  
position.  
After recording  
a Remote control switch (page 12)  
The unit stops at the position where recording ended.  
To play back a clip, press the PREV button to move to the  
start frame of any clip, or press the PREV button with the  
PLAY button held down to move to any position.  
Set to LOCAL.  
b On/standby switch (page 12)  
Indicator (`) lit green.  
After disc insertion  
The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most  
recently ejected.  
Press the PLAY button to resume playback at the most  
recent position.  
The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is  
ejected, which allows playback to start at that position  
whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM player.  
c VARIABLE switch (page 15) and ALL/CH-1, CH-  
2 to CH-4 adjustment knobs (page 15)  
Adjust the audio playback levels.  
d AUDIO MONITOR SEL button (page 15)  
Select the audio channels to monitor.  
e AC power switch (rear panel) (page 11)  
Set to the ` (on) position.  
If you are using DC power or a battery pack, connect the  
DC power or mount the battery pack on the battery pack  
shoe before playback.  
Note  
This function is not available when the Write Inhibit tab of  
the disc is set to the recording disabled position, and when  
extended menu item 310 “REC INHIBIT” is set to “on.”  
The REC INHI indicator may light when neither of the  
above are true if the format of recorded sections on the disc  
is not the same as the recording settings of this unit. In this  
case, the playback position can be saved to the disc.  
f COUNTER SEL button (page 13)  
Select the data (elapsed playback time, time code value or  
user bit data) to be displayed in the time data display.  
When displaying the time code value, select TC or VITC  
with extended menu item 629 “TC SELECT.”  
4-2-1 Preparations for Playback  
Adjusting video processing parameters  
You can adjust the following video processing parameters.  
• Video output level  
• Chroma output level  
Button/switch settings  
Before beginning playback, make any necessary button/  
switch settings.  
• Setup/black level  
• Chroma phase  
• Output signal sync phase  
• Output signal subcarrier phase  
For details of the settings of the buttons/switches, see the  
pages indicated in parenthesis.  
4-2 Playback  
49  
           
A list of button assignments appears at the bottom of  
the screen when you keep the MENU button pressed.  
Video panel  
PROCESS CONTROL  
V
VIDEO  
CHROMA  
BLACK  
VAR ----- -----  
VAR ----- -----  
PRE ----- -----  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
CH-  
15 CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
CHROMA-Ph PRE ----- -----  
SYNC-Ph PRE ----- -----  
SC-Ph  
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
STATUS CHARACTER  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
PRE  
000  
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
PREV:VIDEO  
PLAY:CHROMA  
(<):SYS-Ph  
(>):SC-Ph  
5 1  
MENU button  
4
NEXT:SETUP or BLACK  
STOP:CHROMA-ph  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
EXT  
REMOTE  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
List of parameters assigned to buttons  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
2
Hold down the following buttons and press the RESET  
button to select “PRE” (PRESET: factory preset  
setting) or “VAR” (VARIABLE: adjustable setting).  
Each press of the button switches between “PRE” and  
“VAR.”  
MARK2  
3
1
With the SHIFT button held down, press the STATUS  
button.  
a)  
Button Parameter  
Adjustment range  
–512 to 0 to 511  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
G
Video output level  
1)  
The process control screen appears in the video  
Chroma output level –512 to 0 to 511  
panel.  
Setup/black level  
Chroma phase  
–512 to 0 to 511  
–128 to 0 to 127  
–128 to 0 to 127  
PROCESS CONTROL  
V
VIDEO  
CHROMA  
BLACK  
VAR ----- -----  
VAR ----- -----  
PRE ----- -----  
Output signal sync  
phase  
CHROMA-Ph PRE ----- -----  
SYNC-Ph PRE ----- -----  
SC-Ph PRE 000  
g
Output signal  
subcarrier phase  
0 to 511  
a) Underlined values are the factory defaults.  
KEY ASIGN : MENU  
ADJUST : KEY+JOG DIAL  
PREST/VAR : KEY+RESET  
EXIT : STATUS  
The figure below is an example of the screen that  
appears when you hold the PLAY button down.  
1) When the line mode is 525(U)/525(J), SETUP appears instead of  
BLACK.  
PROCESS CONTROL  
V
CHROMA  
PRE ----- -----  
000  
Notes  
• Do the following operations within 30 seconds. The  
screen returns to the normal screen if no operation is  
done for 30 seconds.  
• The process control screen does not appear if either  
of the following is true.  
- The unit is being controlled from a device  
connected to the REMOTE connector, and basic  
menu item 006 “LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE”  
is set to “dis” or “st&ej.”  
Setting  
- The unit is connected to a computer by FAM or  
FTP, and the computer is logged in to this unit.  
Marker indicating the  
position of the setting in  
the adjustment range  
Select “PRE” or “VAR”  
To check the assignments to buttons which  
select parameters  
50  
4-2 Playback  
3
If you selected “VAR” in step 2, set the parameter  
value by holding down the corresponding button and  
rotating the jog dial, while viewing the video.  
To jump to the next or previous clip, then start  
playback  
Use the PREV button, NEXT button, jog dial, or shuttle  
dial.  
Setting values vary with the rotation speed of the jog  
dial.  
For information about the functions of these buttons, see  
“5 Recording and playback control section” on page 16.  
For details of the jog and shuttle dials, see “3 Jog/shuttle  
control block” on page 14.  
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to set other  
parameters.  
Press the STATUS button to return to the normal  
screen.  
To stop playback  
Press the STOP button.  
If you play back to the end of the last clip  
Playback automatically stops.  
4-2-2 Playback Operation  
If, in this state, you press the PLAY button, the message  
“ALARM DISC END.” appears on the monitor.  
To carry out playback again, move back to the desired clip  
using the PREV button, jog dial or shuttle dial.  
This section describes the following types of playback:  
• Normal playback  
Playback at normal ( 1) speed  
• Playback in jog mode  
Variable speed playback, with the speed determined by  
the speed of turning the jog dial  
• Playback in shuttle mode  
Variable speed playback, with the speed determined by  
the angular position of the shuttle dial  
To record an essence mark  
While playing back a disc, you can record essence marks  
such as shot mark 1 and shot mark 2 in desired frames.  
To record a shot mark 1 or shot mark 2, hold down the F/  
MARK1 or f/MARK2 button and press the SET button.  
Normal playback  
First insert a disc.  
Note  
To erase or change essence marks, use the supplied  
PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software.  
For details of how to insert a disc, see 3-6-4 “Loading and  
Playback in jog mode  
In jog mode, you can control the speed of playback by the  
speed of turning the jog dial. The playback speed range is  
1 times normal speed.  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
To carry out playback in jog mode, proceed as follows.  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
1 2,3  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
STOP button  
NEXT button  
PLAY button  
Shuttle dial Jog dial  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
F/MARK1 button and  
MARK2  
f/MARK2 button  
PREV button  
1
2
Press the JOG button, turning it on.  
To start playback  
Press the PLAY button.  
Playback starts.  
When two or more clips are recorded on the disc, they are  
played back continuously.  
Turn the jog dial in the desired direction, at the speed  
corresponding to the desired playback speed.  
Playback in jog mode starts.  
3
To stop playback in jog mode, stop turning the jog dial.  
Note  
No audio is output when non-audio signals are played  
back.  
When extended menu item 101 “SELECTION FOR  
SEARCH DIAL ENABLE” is set to “dial” (factory default  
4-2 Playback  
51  
               
setting), just turning the jog dial with the JOG button off  
starts playback in jog mode.  
COUNTER SEL button  
SUBCLIP button  
Playback in shuttle mode  
In shuttle mode, you can control the speed of playback by  
the angular position of the shuttle dial. The range of  
playback speed is 20 times normal speed.  
1 3  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
NAIL  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
To carry out playback in shuttle mode, proceed as follows.  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
1
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
EXT  
REMOTE  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
3
2
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
1
With the SUBCLIP button off, press the  
THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.  
MARK2  
The thumbnails of clips on the disc appear.  
3
2,3  
Sixth clip is  
selected from a  
total of 143 clips.  
Name of currently  
selected clip  
a)  
1
2
Press the SHUTTLE button, turning it on.  
Turn the shuttle dial to the desired angle  
Thumbnail of currently selected clip  
b)  
(first frame or specified frame)  
corresponding to the desired playback speed.  
Playback in shuttle mode starts.  
3
To stop playback in shuttle mode, return the shuttle  
dial to the center position, or press the STOP button.  
When extended menu item 101 “SELECTION FOR  
SEARCH DIAL ENABLE” is set to “dial” (factory default  
setting), just turning the shuttle dial with the SHUTTLE  
button off starts playback in shuttle mode.  
To alternate between normal-speed playback and  
shuttle mode playback  
Set the shuttle dial to the position corresponding to the  
desired shuttle playback speed, then switch between  
normal-speed playback and shuttle playback by pressing  
the PLAY and SHUTTLE buttons alternately.  
For intermittent shuttle mode playback, press the STOP  
and SHUTTLE buttons alternately.  
Recording date and  
time of selected clip  
Duration of selected clip or  
time code of first frame  
a) When a title has been assigned to a clip (see page 75), the title  
is enclosed in double quotation marks, for example  
“TITLE00001.”  
b) The thumbnail frame can be specified by a menu selection  
when the clip is recorded (see page 98).  
4-2-3 Thumbnail Search  
Cuing up a desired clip  
To display the thumbnail images of all clips on the disc,  
and cue up a desired clip, proceed as follows.  
To switch between duration and time code display  
in the thumbnail display  
Press the COUNTER SEL button. Each press of the  
button toggles between duration display and time code  
display.  
To escape from the thumbnail display to the full-  
screen display  
52  
4-2 Playback  
         
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning it off.  
2
3
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the  
desired essence mark.  
2
3
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the  
desired clip.  
You can select essence marks with the following  
operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Move to the  
previous or next essence mark.  
You can select clips with the following operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Move to the  
previous or next clip.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  
button held down: Move to the first or last clip.  
Press the F or f button with the SHIFT button held  
down: Switch to the previous or next page.  
Press the SET button.  
Thumbnails of the frames including the selected  
essence mark appear.  
(The example shows the case where SHOTMARK1 is  
selected as the essence mark.)  
To cue up the selected clip, press the SET button.  
To start playback from the selected clip, press the  
PLAY button.  
This indicates that the thumbnail  
images are the frames including the from a total of 31  
essence mark (SHOTMARK1). SHOTMARK1 frames  
Sixth frame is selected  
Cuing up a frame including an essence  
mark  
Proceed as follows.  
RESET button  
3,5  
1
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
EXT  
REMOTE  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
Currently selected  
SHOTMARK1 frame  
3
2,4  
Date and time of recording of the clip  
containing the selected frame  
1
Hold down the SHIFT button, and press the  
THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.  
The essence mark selection screen appears.  
4
5
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the  
desired frame.  
You can select frames with the following operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Move to the  
previous or next frame.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  
button held down: Move to the first or last frame.  
Press the F or f button with the SHIFT button held  
down: Switch to the previous or next page.  
Press the SET button to cue up the selected clip.  
To start playback from the selected frame, press the  
PLAY button.  
To escape from the essence mark selection screen to  
the previous screen  
Press the RESET button.  
4-2 Playback  
53  
 
4-2-4 Clip List Playback  
Sixth frame is selected  
from a total of 34 sub clips  
a)  
Name of current clip list  
You can play back clips in the order of clip lists created  
with the scene selection function (see page 58).  
Total duration of  
sub clips in clip list  
Playing back in clip list order  
Proceed as follows.  
1
If the clip list that you want to play exists on the disc,  
load it into the current clip list.  
About the current clip list, see page 60.  
For the clip list loading operation, see 5-3-1 “Loading  
2
3
Press the SUBCLIP button, turning it on.  
Press the PLAY button.  
Currently  
selected sub clip  
Playback begins from the first sub clip in the current  
clip list.  
Recording date and  
time of selected sub clip  
Duration of selected sub clip  
or time code of first frame  
Note  
a) When a title has been assigned to a clip list, the title is  
enclosed in double quotation marks, for example “SAKURA.”  
Depending on the length of sub clips in the clip list and  
their arrangement on the disc, playback may freeze  
momentarily between sub clips.  
To switch between duration and time code display  
in the thumbnail display  
Press the COUNTER SEL button. Each press of the  
button toggles between duration display and time code  
display.  
Cuing up with sub clip thumbnails  
With the desired clip list loaded in the current clip list,  
proceed as follows.  
1
Press the SUBCLIP button and the THUMBNAIL  
button, turning them on.  
To escape from the thumbnail display to the full-  
screen display  
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning it off.  
Thumbnails of the first frames in the sub clips appear.  
2
3
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the sub  
clip you want to cue up.  
You can select sub clips with the following operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Move to the  
previous or next sub clip.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  
button held down: Move to the first or last sub  
clip.  
Press the F or f button with the SHIFT button held  
down: Switch to the previous or next page.  
To cue up the selected sub clip, press the SET button.  
To start playback from the selected sub clip, press the  
PLAY button.  
4-2-5 Repeat Playback  
You can perform repeat playback for normal and clip list  
playback.  
54  
4-2 Playback  
         
1) This is supported from firmware version 1.5.  
To perform repeat playback, set extended menu item 142  
“REPEAT MODE” to “play,” and then proceed as follows.  
Locking clips  
Locking prevents the following operations on clips.  
• Deletion  
1
Insert a disc.  
To perform repeat playback for normal playback,  
proceed to step 3.  
• Renaming by FAM or FTP  
2
3
To perform repeat playback for clip list playback,  
press the SUBCLIP button.  
Notes  
• Locked clips are erased along with other clips when you  
format a disc.  
• Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write  
Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled  
position, or when extended menu item 310 “REC  
INHIBIT” is set to “on.”  
Press the PLAY button.  
Playback starts from the saved playback position.  
Normal playback: When playback of the last clip  
finishes, it resumes from the start of the disc,  
repeatedly playing from the first through the last  
clip on the disc.  
Clip list playback: When playback of the last sub clip  
finishes, it resumes from the start of the clip list,  
repeatedly playing from the first through the last  
sub clip in the clip list.  
1
With the SUBCLIP button off, press the  
THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.  
The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear.  
2
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the clip  
to lock.  
If extended menu item 142 “REPEAT MODE” is set  
to “play,” repeat playback starts from the first clip  
automatically whenever you power the unit on with a  
disc loaded. Clip list playback starts from the first sub  
clip in the clip list.  
You can select clips with the following operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Move to the  
previous or next clip.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  
button held down: Move to the first or last clip.  
Press the F/f button with the SHIFT button held  
down: Switch to the previous or next page.  
To start repeat playback from the device  
connected to the REMOTE connector  
Set extended menu item 142 “REPEAT MODE” to “play,”  
and then send a repeat playback command from the  
external device.  
3
With the SHIFT button held down, press the  
SUBCLIP button. Or press the MENU button.  
The THUMBNAIL MENU appears.  
For details of commands, refer to REMOTE (9-pin)  
Protocol Manual for the PDW series.  
To stop repeat playback  
Do one of the following.  
• Operate any of the playback buttons except the PLAY  
button, or operate the jog or shuttle dial.  
• From the external device connected to the REMOTE  
connector on this unit, send a command other than the  
repeat playback start command to this unit.  
The unit executes the operation for the button press, jog or  
search dial operation, or remote command that stops  
playback. (The unit enters search mode when you conduct  
a search, and stop mode at the end of the disc.)  
To escape from the THUMBNAIL MENU to the  
previous screen  
Press the RESET button.  
To disable repeat playback  
Set extended menu item 142 “REPEAT MODE” to “off.”  
4
With LOCK/UNLOCK CLIP selected, press the SET  
button.  
4-2-6 Locking and Deleting Clips  
In the thumbnail screen, you can delete selected clips or  
1)  
lock them so that they cannot be deleted.  
4-2 Playback  
55  
       
You return to the thumbnail screen, and a lock icon  
appears on the thumbnail of the selected clip to show  
that it is locked.  
All clips are locked, and you return to the thumbnail  
screen.  
To unlock all clips  
Carry out the procedure in “To lock all clips,” selecting  
UNLOCK ALL CLIPS in step 2.  
Lock icon  
Deleting clips  
Notes  
• Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the  
disc is set to the recording disabled position, or when  
extended menu item 310 “REC INHIBIT” is set to “on.”  
• Locked clips cannot be deleted.  
• When the target clip is referenced in a clip list, the clip  
list that references the clip will also be deleted.  
You can use the DISC MENU to delete the last clip or all  
clips. For details, see page 118.  
1
With the SUBCLIP button off, press the  
THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.  
Locked clips cannot be deleted or renamed. Unlock the  
clip if you want to perform any of these operations.  
The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear.  
To lock clips without displaying the THUMBNAIL  
MENU  
After carrying out step 2 in the procedure, press the STOP  
button with the SHIFT button held down (shortcut  
operation).  
2
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the clip  
to delete.  
You can select clips with the following operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Move to the  
previous or next clip.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  
button held down: Move to the first or last clip.  
Press the F/f button with the SHIFT button held  
down: Switch to the previous or next page.  
To unlock clips  
Carry out step 2 of “Locking clips” to select a locked clip  
(one with the lock icon displayed on its thumbnail). Then  
do one of the following.  
• Carry out steps 3 and 4 of “Locking clips.”  
• Press the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down  
(shortcut operation).  
3
4
With the SHIFT button held down, press the  
SUBCLIP button. Or press the MENU button.  
To lock all clips  
The THUMBNAIL MENU appears (see step 3 of  
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 3 of “Locking clips” to display  
the THUMBNAIL MENU.  
To escape from the THUMBNAIL MENU to the  
previous screen  
Press the RESET button.  
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select LOCK  
ALL CLIPS, and then press the SET button.  
A confirmation screen appears.  
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select DELETE  
CLIP, and then press the SET button.  
To cancel the lock operation and return to the  
thumbnail screen  
Do one of the following.  
• Use the G or gbutton to select “CANCEL,” and then  
press the SET button.  
Thumbnails of four frames in the target clip appear.  
One of the following messages appears in a  
confirmation dialog, depending on whether the target  
clip is referenced in a clip list.  
• Press the RESET button.  
When the target clip is not referenced in a clip list:  
“DELETE CLIP?”  
3
Use the G or g button to select “OK,” and then press  
the SET button.  
56  
4-2 Playback  
   
When the target clip is referenced in a clip list:  
“DELETE CLIP & CLIP LIST?” (The clip list that  
references the clip will also be deleted.)  
To go to the clip deletion screen without displaying  
the THUMBNAIL MENU  
After step 2, press the RESET button with the SHIFT  
button held down (shortcut operation).  
To cancel the deletion and return to the thumbnail  
screen  
Do one of the following.  
• Use the F or fbutton to select “CANCEL,” and then  
press the SET button.  
• Press the RESET button.  
5
Use the F or f button to select “OK,” and then press  
the SET button.  
The clip is deleted and you return to the thumbnail  
screen.  
To delete all clips  
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 3 of “Deleting clips” to display  
the THUMBNAIL MENU.  
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select DELETE  
ALL CLIPS, and then press the SET button.  
A confirmation screen appears.  
To cancel the deletion and return to the thumbnail  
screen  
Do one of the following.  
• Use the F or fbutton to select “CANCEL,” and then  
press the SET button.  
• Press the RESET button.  
3
Use the F or f button to select “OK,” and then press  
the SET button.  
All clips are deleted, and you return to the thumbnail  
screen.  
4-2 Playback  
57  
Scene Selection  
5
Chapter  
5-1Overview  
What is scene selection?  
Scene selection is a function which allows you to select  
material (clips) from the material recorded on a disc and  
perform cut editing. You can do this by operating on this  
unit only.  
• Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut  
editing in the field and in other offline situations.  
• Clip lists (edit data) created with the scene selection  
function can be used on XPRI and other full-feature  
nonlinear editing systems.  
58  
5-1 Overview  
         
Flow of scene selection editing  
Disc  
Insert disc containing recorded  
material into this unit  
I
PDW-510/530  
PDW-R1  
To edit a clip list  
Load clip lists (see page 68)  
Create and edit a clip list  
Sub  
clip 3  
Sub  
clip 1  
Sub  
clip 2  
• Selecting clips (see page 61)  
Clip 1  
Clip 2 Clip 3  
Clip 4  
Select  
clips  
Recorded material  
Clip list 1  
• Reordering sub clips (see page 63)  
• Trimming sub clips (see page 65)  
• Deleting sub clips (see page 66)  
• Previewing clip lists (see page 66)  
Clip 1  
Clip 2  
Clip 3  
Clip list 1  
Save the clip list to disc (see page 66)  
Disc  
Sub  
Sub  
Sub  
clip 1 clip 2 clip 3  
Play back the clip list (see page 54)  
I
D
S
Play back clip list  
PDW-R1  
5-1 Overview  
59  
Clips  
Clip list name  
Material recorded on a disc with this unit is managed in  
units called “clips.” A clip contains the material between a  
recording start point (In point) and a recording end point  
(Out point).  
Clips have names beginning with “C” for example  
“C0001.”  
Out point  
In point  
r
Out point  
In point  
r
Out point  
In point  
r
Out  
point  
r
In point  
r
Clip 1  
(C0001)  
Clip 2  
(C0002)  
Clip 3  
(C0003)  
Clip 4  
(C0004)  
Thumbnails of selected clips  
Clip name  
Sub clips (clips in clip lists)  
The specified clips (or parts of clips) in a clip list are called  
“sub clips.” Sub clips are virtual data specifying ranges in  
the original clips. Clip data in the original clips is not  
overwritten.  
Clip 1  
(C0001)  
Clip 2  
(C0002)  
Clip 3  
(C0003)  
Clip 4  
(C0004)  
Sub clip 1  
Sub clip 2  
Sub clip 3  
Clip lists  
Example: Clip list (E0001)  
Data called a “clip list” is created when you use the scene  
selection function to select desired clips from the clips  
stored on a disc.  
Clip lists have names beginning with “E” for example  
“E0001.” You can save up to 99 clip lists on a disc.  
Clip list editing (current clip list)  
Clip lists cannot be edited on disc. To edit clip lists, you  
need to load them, one at a time, into the unit memory.  
The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory  
is called the “current clip list.”  
The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation  
and editing. Clip list playback also uses the current clip  
list.  
After creating and editing a clip list, you need to save it to  
disc.  
60  
5-1 Overview  
           
Unit memory  
5-2Creating Clip Lists  
Current clip list  
Can be edited (adding, deleting,  
and reordering sub clips)  
t Clip list playback  
and thumbnail  
display  
Before starting  
SAVE  
Disc  
m
M
LOAD  
Insert a disc containing recorded clips into the unit.  
5-2-1 Selecting Clips  
There are two ways to select clips.  
• Select from the thumbnail screen.  
You can select the desired clips from the thumbnail  
screen.  
• Select while playing back or searching.  
You can select the scene to use while viewing the video.  
C0001 (Clip 1)  
C0002 (Clip 2)  
C0003 (Clip 3)  
:
:
E0001 (Clip list 1)  
E0002 (Clip list 2)  
E0003 (Clip list 3)  
:
:
E0099 (Clip list 99)  
The clips selected here are added to the current clip list as  
sub clips.  
Clip list playback  
Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc.  
Clips are played back according to clip list data.  
SET button  
SUBCLIP button  
THUMBNAIL button  
SHIFT button  
RESET button  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
EXT  
REMOTE  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
Jog dial  
g/OUT button  
Arrow buttons  
G/IN button  
NEXT button  
PREV button  
To select from the thumbnail screen  
1
With the SUBCLIP button off, press the  
THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.  
Thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear.  
5-2 Creating Clip Lists  
61  
     
The scene selection window displays thumbnails of  
the sub clips that have been added to the current clip  
list. The cursor in the window indicates the position  
where the next sub clip will be added.  
Total duration of sub clips in  
the current clip list  
2
3
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the  
desired clip.  
You can also select clips with the following  
operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Moves to the  
previous or next clip.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  
button held down: Moves to the first or last clip.  
Press the F or f button with the SHIFT button held  
down: Switches to the previous or next page.  
(Does not switch when there is only one page.)  
Cursor (indicates where the  
next sub clip will be added)  
Thumbnails of sub clips already  
added to the current clip list  
With the SHIFT button held down, press the SET  
button.  
To move the cursor in the scene selection window  
After carrying out step 3 to display the scene selection  
window, press the G or g button.  
The scene selection window appears.  
6
When you have finished selecting all the clips you  
want, save the current clip list to disc.  
66).  
To select while playing back and searching  
(quick scene selection)  
1
With the SUBCLIP button off, and the clip displayed  
in full-screen mode, play back the clip or conduct a  
search to find the point that you want to set as the In  
point.  
To return to the original screen  
Press the RESET button.  
To display the desired clip in full-screen mode  
If the thumbnail screen is displayed, use the arrow  
buttons or jog dial to select the clip to display in full-  
screen mode, and then press the SET button.  
4
5
Press the SET button.  
The selected clip is added to the current clip list as a  
sub clip.  
At the same time, the scene selection window closes  
and you return to the original thumbnail screen.  
Repeat steps 2 to 4 until you have added all of the  
desired clips to the current clip list.  
You can select the same clip any number of times.  
62  
5-2 Creating Clip Lists  
   
5
6
Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you have added all of the clips  
you want to the current clip list.  
Save the current clip list to disc.  
66).  
5-2-2 Reordering Sub Clips  
SET button  
To search  
Use the jog and shuttle dials.  
SUBCLIP button  
THUMBNAIL button  
SHIFT button  
RESET button  
2
3
At the point you want to set as the In point, hold down  
the G/IN button and press the SET button.  
An In point is set, and the IN indicator lights.  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
In the same way, search for the point you want to set  
as the Out point, and then hold down the g/OUT  
button and press the SET button.  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
AUDIO  
MARK1  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
An Out point is set, and the OUT indicator lights.  
Clips recorded on the disc  
Jog dial  
g/OUT button  
Arrow buttons  
G/IN button  
NEXT button  
Clip 1  
Clip 2  
Clip 3  
In point  
Out point  
PREV button  
Sub clip 1  
Sub clip 2  
Sub clip 3  
1
2
Press the SUBCLIP button, turning it on.  
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.  
To check the duration  
Press the G/IN button and the g/OUT button at the  
same time.  
Thumbnails of the sub clips in the current clip list  
appear.  
The duration appears on the screen.  
To reset an In point or Out point  
With the G/IN button or g/OUT button held down,  
press the RESET button.  
4
With the SHIFT button held down, press the SET  
button.  
The section between the In point and Out point is  
added to the end of the current clip list as a sub clip.  
When you set In and Out points stretching across  
several clips  
One sub clip is created for each of the clips.  
If the clip list you want to edit is not the current clip  
list  
5-2 Creating Clip Lists  
63  
   
Load the clip list from the disc into the unit memory  
Indicates that the third sub clip will be  
moved to the position of the eighth sub clip.  
To return to the full-screen display  
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.  
3
4
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the  
desired sub clip.  
You can also select sub clips with the following  
operations.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Moves to the  
previous or next sub clip.  
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  
button held down: Moves to the first or last sub  
clip.  
Press the F or f button with the SHIFT button held  
down: Switches to the previous or next page.  
(Does not switch when there is only one page.)  
Cursor indicating the move destination  
for the selected sub clip  
With the SHIFT button held down, press the SET  
button.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press the RESET button.  
The sub clip operation menu appears.  
6
7
Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to move the  
cursor to the position where you want to move the  
selected sub clip.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
Press the SET button.  
The sub clip thumbnail screen appears, allowing you  
to check the results of the sub clip movement.  
To return to the thumbnail screen without moving  
the sub clip  
Do one of the following.  
• Press the F or f button to select EXIT, and then  
press the SET button.  
• Press the RESET button.  
5
Use the F or f button to select MOVE, and then press  
the SET button.  
The sub clip movement screen appears. The clip  
selected in step 3 appears surrounded by a frame.  
8
Save the current clip list to disc.  
66).  
64  
5-2 Creating Clip Lists  
 
4
At the scene where you want to set a new In or Out  
point, hold down the G/IN button (to change the In  
point) or the g/OUT button (to change the Out point)  
and press the SET button.  
5-2-3 Trimming Sub Clips  
SET button  
Depending on the button that you pressed, a new In or  
Out point is set.  
THUMBNAIL button  
SHIFT button  
To change both the In and Out points  
Carry out steps 3 and 4 for both the In and Out points.  
RESET button  
To reset the In or Out point  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
With the G/IN button or g/OUT button held down,  
press the RESET button. The In or Out point is  
restored to the value it had before the sub clip trim  
screen opened.  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
To cue up the In or Out point  
With the G/IN button held down, press the PREV  
button. Or with the the g/OUT button held down, press  
the NEXT button.  
Jog dial  
g/OUT button  
F/f buttons  
G/IN button  
NEXT button  
PREV button  
Note Note  
You can escape from the sub clip trim screen to full-  
screen display without executing a trim if you press the  
THUMBNAIL button.  
5
Once you have set the new In point or Out point, hold  
down the SHIFT button and press the SET button.  
1
2
Carry out steps 1 to 4 of 5-2-2 “Reordering Sub Clips”  
to select a sub clip and display the sub clip operation  
menu.  
The trim is executed, and you return to the sub clip  
thumbnail display.  
Use the F or f button to select TRIM, and then press  
the SET button.  
The first frame of the selected sub clip appears. The  
first and last frames are set as provisional In and Out  
points, and the IN and OUT indicators light.  
In this state, you can play back and search the entire  
disc.  
To cancel the trim  
Reset the In or Out point to the value it had before you  
entered the sub clip trim screen, and then hold down  
the SHIFT button and press the SET button.  
To cancel the trim and return to the previous  
screen  
6
Save the current clip list to disc.  
With the SHIFT button held down, press the SET  
button.  
66).  
3
Play back and search the disc to find scenes to set new  
In and Out points.  
5-2 Creating Clip Lists  
65  
   
5-2-4 Deleting Sub Clips  
SET button  
RESET button  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
EXT  
REMOTE  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
4
Save the current clip list to disc.  
g/OUT button  
F/f buttons  
G/IN button  
66).  
5-2-5 Previewing the Current Clip  
List  
1
2
Carry out steps 1 to 4 of 5-2-2 “Reordering Sub Clips”  
to select a sub clip and display the sub clip operation  
menu.  
Press the SUBCLIP button, turning it on, and then press  
the PLAY button.  
When the THUMBNAIL button is lit, playback starts from  
the beginning of the selected sub clip.  
Use the F or f button to select DELETE, and then  
press the SET button.  
The sub clip deletion screen appears.  
When the THUMBNAIL button is not lit, playback starts  
from the first sub clip in the clip list.  
5-2-6 Saving the Current Clip List to  
Disc  
The current clip list is not saved to disc unless you carry  
out this procedure. After editing clip list data, you should  
always save it to disc.  
Notes  
• The current clip list is not saved to disc if the disc’s write  
protect tab is set to the recording disabled position.  
• Unless you carry out this procedure, the unit does not  
enter the standby state even if you set the on/standby  
switch to the 1 position. Follow the message that  
appears and return the on/standby switch to the & side,  
and then save the clip list or, if you do not need it, clear  
To cancel the deletion and return to the previous  
screen  
Do one of the following  
• Use the G or g button to select CANCEL, and then  
press the SET button.  
• Press the RESET button.  
The screen returns to the sub clip thumbnail display.  
3
Use the G or g button to select OK, and then press the  
SET button.  
The selected sub clip is deleted, and the screen returns  
to the sub clip thumbnail display.  
66  
5-2 Creating Clip Lists  
             
SAVE CLIP LIST  
SAVE E0005 OK ?  
SET button  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
SAVE :  
SET KEY  
MENU KEY  
TO MENU :  
To cancel the save  
Press the MENU button.  
g/OUT button  
F/f buttons  
4
Press the SET button.  
1
2
Display the CLIP menu.  
The current clip list is saved to disc.  
To assign a title to a clip list  
Use the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software.  
Use the F or f button to move the cursor to SAVE, and  
then press the g button.  
For details, see the PDZ-1 online help.  
A list of clip lists appears.  
“NEW FILE” is displayed for clip lists without any  
registered data.  
The date of creation or the title is displayed for each  
clip list.  
CLIP MENU  
SAVE  
E0001 04/08/08 21:57  
E0002 04/08/24 11:15  
E0003 04/08/25 15:30  
E0004 NEW FILE  
E0005 NEW FILE  
E0006 NEW FILE  
E0007 NEW FILE  
E0008 NEW FILE  
E0009 NEW FILE  
TITLE : SHIFT+SET KEY  
To switch between display of dates of creation,  
titles, and clip list names  
With the SHIFT button held down, press the SET  
button.  
With each press, the display changes as follows.  
Dates of creation > titles > clip list names > dates of  
creation...  
3
Use the F or f button or the jog dial to select the  
desired clip list, and then press the g button.  
A confirmation message like the one shown below  
appears.  
5-2 Creating Clip Lists  
67  
Item  
Operation  
5-3Managing Clip Lists  
(CLIP Menu)  
LOAD  
Load a clip list from the disc into the current  
SAVE  
Save the current clip list to disc (see page  
After you create a clip list, you can use the CLIP menu to  
save it to disc, load it from disc into the unit memory, and  
delete it from the disc.  
The CLIP menu also allows you to clear and edit the  
current clip list.  
DELETE  
CLEAR  
Delete a clip list from the disc (see page 69)  
Clear the current clip list from the unit  
TC  
Preset the first time code in the current clip  
PRESET  
Note Note  
SORT BY  
Sort clip lists by name or date of creation  
Carry out CLIP menu operations with the unit stopped. If  
the message “STOP ONCE, THEN EXECUTE.” appears,  
press the STOP button.  
To escape from the CLIP menu.  
To display the CLIP menu  
Press the MENU button.  
SUBCLIP button  
THUMBNAIL button  
SHIFT button  
5-3-1 Loading a Clip List From Disc  
Into Unit Memory  
The clip list loaded with this procedure becomes the  
current clip list.  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
1
Display the CLIP menu.  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
2
Use the F button to move the cursor to LOAD, and  
then press the g button.  
SET button  
MENU button  
A list of clip lists appears.  
The date of creation or the title is displayed for each  
clip list.  
CLIP MENU  
LOAD  
With the THUMBNAIL button off, hold down the SHIFT  
button and press the SUBCLIP button.  
E0001 04/08/08 21:57  
E0002 04/08/24 11:15  
E0003 04/08/25 15:30  
E0004 NEW FILE  
If the THUMBNAIL button is lit  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to turn it off.  
E0005 NEW FILE  
The CLIP menu appears.  
E0006 NEW FILE  
E0007 NEW FILE  
CLIP MENU  
LOAD  
E0008 NEW FILE  
E0009 NEW FILE  
SAVE  
TITLE : SHIFT+SET KEY  
DELETE  
CLEAR  
TC PRESET  
To switch between display of dates of creation,  
titles, and clip list names  
SORT BY  
: name  
With the SHIFT button held down, press the SET  
button.  
With each press, the display changes as follows.  
Dates of creation > titles > clip list names > dates of  
creation...  
68  
5-3 Managing Clip Lists (CLIP Menu)  
             
3
Use the F or f button or the jog dial to select the  
desired clip list, and then press the g button  
3
Use the F or f button or the jog dial to select the  
desired clip list, and then press the g button.  
A confirmation message like the one shown below  
appears.  
A confirmation message like the one shown below  
appears.  
LOAD CLIP LIST  
LOAD E0002 OK ?  
DELETE CLIP LIST  
DELETE E0001 OK ?  
LOAD :  
SET KEY  
MENU KEY  
DELETE :  
SET KEY  
MENU KEY  
TO MENU :  
TO MENU :  
4
Press the SET button.  
4
Press the SET button.  
The selected clip list is loaded into the unit memory as  
the current clip list.  
The selected clip list is deleted from the disc.  
If an unsaved current clip list exists in the unit  
memory  
A warning message like the following appears.  
“CLIP LIST IS NOT SAVED. OVERWRITE CLIP  
LIST?”  
5-3-3 Clearing the Current Clip List  
From the Unit Memory  
This operation clears the current clip list, so that no clip list  
is loaded in the unit memory.  
Press the SET button to overwrite the unsaved current clip  
list, or press the MENU button to quit without overwriting.  
1
Display the CLIP menu.  
To display thumbnails of the sub clips in the  
newly loaded current clip list  
Press the SUBCLIP button, and then press the  
THUMBNAIL button.  
2
Use the F or f button to move the cursor to CLEAR,  
and then press the g button.  
A message like the one shown below appears.  
5-3-2 Deleting Clip Lists From a Disc  
CLEAR CLIP LIST  
1
Display the CLIP menu.  
CLEAR OK ?  
2
Use the F or f button to move the cursor to DELETE,  
and then press the g button.  
A list of clip lists appears.  
The date of creation or the title is displayed for each  
clip list. The date of creation is always displayed for  
clip lists without titles.  
CLEAR :  
SET KEY  
MENU KEY  
TO MENU :  
3
Press the SET button.  
To switch between display of dates of creation,  
titles, and clip list names  
The current clip list is cleared from the unit memory.  
With the SHIFT button held down, press the SET  
button.  
5-3-4 Presetting the Initial Time  
Code of the Current Clip List  
With each press, the display changes as follows.  
Dates of creation > titles > clip list names > dates of  
creation...  
When the unit is powered on, and when you insert a new  
disc, the initial time code of the current clip list is set to  
5-3 Managing Clip Lists (CLIP Menu)  
69  
         
“00:00.00.00.” You can set the initial time code to any  
value.  
5-3-5 Sorting Clip Lists  
Proceed as follows to sort the existing clip lists by clip list  
name or by date of creation.  
1
Load an existing clip list for which you want to set the  
initial time code into to the unit memory as the current  
clip list.  
1
Display the CLIP menu.  
2
Use the F or f button to select SORT BY, and then  
2
3
Display the CLIP menu.  
press the g button.  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
CLIP MENU  
Use the f button to select TC PRESET, and then press  
the g button.  
SORT BY  
*NAME(A-Z)  
: name  
DATE(NEWEST FIRST)  
A screen like the one shown below appears.  
CLIP LIST TC PRESET  
00:00.00.00  
INC/DEC :  
SHIFT : ( )( ) KEY  
DATA SAVE : SET KEY  
TO MENU : MENU KEY  
JOG DIAL  
3
4
Use the F or f button to select NAME or DATE.  
NAME: Sort in ascending order by clip list name  
(factory default setting).  
DATE: Sort by date of creation, with the newest clip  
list first.  
The time code shown in this screen is the current initial  
time code of the current clip list. If you have already  
set the initial time code for this clip list, that time code  
is displayed.  
Press the G button to return to the CLIP menu screen.  
The clip lists are sorted by the method you chose in  
step 3.  
Unused clip lists are excluded from the sort.  
4
5
Repeat the following operations to set a time code  
value (LTC).  
• Press the G or g button to select the digit to replace.  
• Rotate the jog dial to set a value.  
Press the SET button.  
The initial time code (LTC) of the current clip list is  
set. When the clip list is played back, time code will  
start counting from that value.  
To check the time code after setting it  
Press the SUBCLIP button, turning it on. The initial  
time code of the current clip list appears in the TCR  
field.  
6
Save the current clip list to disc.  
66).  
70  
5-3 Managing Clip Lists (CLIP Menu)  
   
transferred is about 1.4 GB per disc (when recording in  
the DVCAM format).  
• To transfer files between the computer and this unit  
requires this unit’s IP address and other network-related  
settings to be made.  
5-4Using PDZ-1 Proxy  
Browsing Software  
For details of the network-related settings, see “To  
When a computer with the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing  
Software installed is connected to this unit, you can  
transfer the proxy AV data and metadata files recorded on  
a disc to the computer. On the computer side, PDZ-1  
enables you to browse the proxy AV data, add or modify  
metadata (titles, comments, essence marks, etc.), or create  
a clip list.  
The modified metadata and the created clip list can then be  
written back to the disc loaded in this unit.  
Live logging function  
If you set extended menu item 258 “LIVE LOGGING” to  
“on,” you can use PDZ-1 to do the following during  
recording of high-resolution data: view proxy AV data,  
perform cut editing of the data, and enter metadata.  
For more information about PDZ-1 functions and  
operations, refer to the PDZ-1 help.  
System requirements  
The following are required to use PDZ-1.  
• Computer:  
- When using the live logging function:  
PC with Intel Pentium 4 CPU, at least 2 GHz (installed  
memory: at least 512 MB)  
- When not using the live logging function:  
PC with Intel Pentium III CPU, at least 1 GHz  
(installed memory: at least 512 MB)  
• Operating system: Microsoft Windows 2000 Service  
Pack 4 or higher, or Microsoft Windows XP  
Professional Service Pack 1 or higher  
• Web browser: Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 1 or  
higher  
• DirectX: DirectX 8.1b or higher  
To install PDZ-1  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing  
Software) in the CD-ROM drive of the computer and  
execute the Setup.exe file, then follow the installation  
instructions.  
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD-  
ROM disc.  
Notes  
• Make sure that the hard disk drive on which the work  
folder to store the material transferred from this unit has  
adequate free space. The amount of proxy AV data  
5-4 Using PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software  
71  
             
File Operations  
6
Chapter  
6-1Overview  
root a)  
INDEX.XML  
A remote computer can be connected to this unit and used  
to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data  
files, such as video and audio data files.  
There are two ways to connect a remote computer.  
• FAM connection  
ALIAS.XML b)  
DISCMETA.XML  
MEDIAPRO.XML  
Connect the S400 (i.LINK) connector on this unit to  
the i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the remote  
computer, using an i.LINK cable (see page 78).  
• FTP connection  
Clip  
C0001.MXF  
Connect the network connectors on this unit and the  
remote computer, using a network cable (see page 80).  
C0001M01.XML  
C0002.MXF  
C0002M01.XML  
C0003.MXF  
6-1-1 Directory Structure  
The following figure shows the directory structure of discs  
visible to a remote computer.  
C0003M01.XML  
Edit  
Note  
E0001E01.SMI  
E0001M01.XML  
E0002E01.SMI  
E0002M01.XML  
This structure is not the same as the actual structure  
recorded on the disc.  
Sub  
C0001S01.MXF  
C0002S01.MXF  
C0003S01.MXF  
General  
a) Root directory  
b) Only when sub item “NAMING FORM” of basic menu item 036 is set to  
“free”  
72  
6-1 Overview  
             
6-1-2 File Operation Restrictions  
This section explains which operations are possible on  
files stored in each directory.  
When required, the following operation tables distinguish  
reading and overwriting from partial reading and  
overwriting.  
Partial read: Read only a part of the data in the file.  
Overwrite: Overwrite data sequentially from the start  
to the end of the file.  
Partial overwrite: Overwrite data to a part of the file  
only.  
Read: Read data sequentially from the start to the end  
of the file.  
Root directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/  
Overwrite/ Rename  
Partial read Partial  
overwrite  
Create  
No  
Delete  
No  
INDEX.XML  
Contains data for management of Yes  
the audio/video material on the  
disc.  
No  
No  
No  
a)  
Contains conversion tables for  
assigning user-defined names to  
clips and clip lists.  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
ALIAS.XML  
b)  
DISCMETA.XML Contains metadata to indicate the Yes  
disc properties.  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
MEDIAPRO.XML Contains a list of audio/video  
material on the disc, basic  
Yes  
properties, related information, and  
information about access methods.  
Other files  
Files other than the above  
No  
No  
a) Only when sub item “NAMING FORM” of basic menu item 036 is set to  
“free”  
b) Only files which can be overwritten by XDCAM  
Notes  
• Directories cannot be created in the root directory.  
• The directories in the root directory (Clip, Edit, Sub, and  
General) cannot be deleted or renamed.  
Clip directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/  
Partial read Partial  
overwrite  
No  
Overwrite/ Rename  
Create  
Delete  
a)  
b)  
f)  
c)  
d)  
Clip file created by recording (MXF  
file)  
*: 0001 to 4999  
C*.MXF  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
a)  
e)  
g)  
h)  
Metadata file generated  
automatically when C*.MXF file is  
created.  
Yes  
C*M01.XML  
Yes  
No  
No  
*: 0001 to 4999  
Other files  
Files other than the above  
No  
No  
a) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, the unit can handle files with user-  
defined names in the “C*” part.  
b) Possible with firmware version 1.5 and higher.  
firmware version 1.4x and lower, only the most recently recorded clip may  
be deleted. With firmware version 1.5 and higher, any clip may be selected  
and deleted.  
c) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length, in a format matching  
the line mode format (525/625) and recording format (IMX50/IMX40/  
IMX30/DVCAM) and number of audio channels of the recorded sections  
of the disc, and which can be overwritten by XDCAM.  
e) Only files which can be overwritten by XDCAM  
f) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, when the “C*” part of a C*.MXF  
file name is changed, a C*M01.XML with the same name in the “C*” part  
is also changed automatically.  
d) Only when the write inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording, and  
when extended menu item 310 “REC INHIBIT” is set to “off.” With  
g) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*M01.XML file with the same name  
in the “C*” part is created automatically.  
6-1 Overview  
73  
   
h) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*M01.XML file with the same name  
in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically.  
clips on that disc. (The only possible operations are  
playback and disc formatting.)  
- Writing of clips with user-defined names  
- Locking of clips  
Notes  
• Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory.  
• When the following operations, supported by version 1.5  
and higher XDCAM devices, are carried out on a disc,  
then it becomes impossible for version 1.4x and lower  
XDCAM devices to record new clips or delete existing  
- Deletion of clips (except the last recorded clip)  
• If you attempt to write a C*.MXF file which does not  
meet the conditions specified as remark c) on this table  
via a FAM connection, a Windows error message  
appears to the effect that the file or directory is corrupt  
and cannot be read.  
Edit directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/  
Partial read Partial  
overwrite  
Overwrite/ Rename  
Create  
Delete  
a)  
b)  
c)  
f)  
d)  
e)  
Clip list file  
*: 0001 to 0099  
E*E01.SMI  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
a)  
b)  
g)  
h)  
Metadata file generated  
automatically when E*E01.SMI file  
is created.  
E*M01.XML  
Yes  
No  
No  
*: 0001 to 0099  
Other files  
Files other than the above  
No  
No  
a) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, the unit can handle files with user-  
defined names in the “E*E01” part.  
g) When an E*E01.SMI file is created, an E*M01.XML file with the same  
name in the “E*” part is created automatically.  
b) Only files which can be overwritten by XDCAM. Partial overwriting is not  
possible.  
h) When an E*E01.SMI file is deleted, the E*M01.XML file with the same  
name in the “E*” part is also deleted automatically.  
c) Possible with firmware version 1.5 and higher.  
d) Only files which can be overwritten by XDCAM  
Note  
e) Only when the write inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording, and  
when extended menu item 310 “REC INHIBIT” is set to “off.”  
f) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, when the “E*E01” part of an  
E*E01.SMI file name is changed, an E*M01.XML file with the same  
name in the “E*” part is generated automatically.  
Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory.  
Sub directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/  
Partial read Partial  
overwrite  
No  
Overwrite/ Rename  
Create  
Delete  
a)  
b)  
c)  
d)  
Proxy AV data (MXF) file generated Yes  
automatically when a C*.MXF file is  
created.  
C*S01.MXF  
Other files  
No  
No  
No  
*: 0001 to 4999  
Files other than the above  
No  
No  
a) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, the unit can handle files with user-  
defined names in the “C*” part.  
b) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, when the “C*” part of a C*.MXF  
file name is changed, a C*S01. MXF file with the same name in the “C*”  
part is generated automatically.  
c) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*S01.XML file with the same name in  
the “C*” part is created automatically.  
d) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*S01.XML file with the same name  
in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically.  
Note  
Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory.  
74  
6-1 Overview  
General directory  
File name  
Content  
Operations  
Read/  
Overwrite/ Rename  
Create  
Delete  
Partial read Partial  
overwrite  
a)  
b)  
Any file  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length. (Depending on the  
character type, file names (including extension) may be limited to 21  
characters.)  
b) Only when the write inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording, and  
when extended menu item 310 “REC INHIBIT” is set to “off.”  
C0020.MXF  
0002.MXF  
C0001.MXF  
The following directory operations are possible in the  
General directory.  
TITLE00020  
• Directory creation (up to 64 levels, including the  
General directory)  
TITLE00002  
TITLE00001  
• Deletion and renaming of directories  
Clips recorded on Disc 1  
Notes  
• The maximum number of files which can be created on  
a disc, including directories, is 5,000.  
C0017.MXF  
0002.MXF  
C0001.MXF  
• File names and directory names can use letters, numbers,  
and symbols from the Unicode 2.0 (UTF-8) character  
1)  
set.  
TITLE00037  
However, the following control characters and symbols  
cannot be used.  
TITLE00022  
TITLE00021  
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F  
- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ', ?, \, |  
Clips recorded on Disc 2  
1) This is supported from firmware version 1.4. However, the following  
character codes cannot be used by FAM connections.  
U+010000, U+020000, U+030000, U+040000, U+050000, U+060000,  
U+070000, U+080000, U+090000, U+0A0000, U+0B0000, U+0C0000,  
U+0D0000, U+0E0000, U+0F0000, U+100000  
Proceed as follows to specify a title and assign it to  
recorded clips.  
1
2
3
Press the MENU button.  
(There are no limits to characters which can be used by FTP connections.)  
Rotate the jog or shuttle dial to display menu item 035.  
6-1-3 Assigning User-Defined Clip  
Titles  
With the SHUTTLE button held down, rotate the jog  
or shuttle dial to select “on.”  
By default, clips on each disc are assigned names in the  
range C0001.MXF to C4999.MXF. For this reason, two  
discs can contain clips with the same names. The  
automatic title generation function allows you to assign  
titles to all of the clips on several discs, which facilitates  
clip management. For example, if the titles TITLE00001 to  
TITLE00020 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to  
C0020.MXF on disc 1, then the titles TITLE00021 to  
TITLE00037 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to  
C0017.MXF on disc 2.  
4
Press the SET button.  
The clip title naming screen appears.  
ITEM-035  
CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT  
*TITLE  
PREFIX  
NUMERIC  
- disable  
- TITLE  
- 00001  
6-1 Overview  
75  
     
5
With the STOP button held down, rotate the jog or  
shuttle dial to move the asterisk (*) on the left of the  
menu items to “TITLE.”  
6-1-4 Assigning User-Defined Clip  
and Clip List Names  
The asterisk indicates the selected item.  
The following standard format names are assigned  
automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or  
recorded by XDCAM devices.  
6
7
With the SHUTTLE button held down, rotate the jog  
or shuttle dial to select “enable.”  
Clips: C0001.MXF to C4999.MXF  
Clip lists: E0001E01.SMI to E0099E01.SMI  
This unit can handle clips and clip lists with user-defined  
names as well as names in the standard format.  
The automatic title generation function is enabled.  
1)  
With the STOP button held down, rotate the jog or  
shuttle dial to move the asterisk to the item that you  
want to set first.  
1) This is supported from firmware version 1.5.  
Limitations  
PREFIX: A string of up to 10 characters. The  
allowable characters are alphanumeric characters,  
symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) + , - . ; = @ [ ] ^ _ { } ~),  
and the space character.  
NUMERIC: A five-digit number (00001 to 99999) to  
serve as the initial value of the serial number.  
• Letters, numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2.0  
character set can be used.  
However, the following control characters and symbols  
cannot be used.  
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F  
- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ?, \, |  
• Depending on the character type, the length of user-  
defined names (the “C*” or “E*E01” part) may be  
limited to 14 characters. (The limit for ASCII characters  
is 56 characters.)  
• All file name extensions are converted automatically to  
uppercase.  
8
9
Rotate the jog or shuttle dial to select the character  
position to set.  
With the SHUTTLE button held down, rotate the jog  
or shuttle dial to select the character to set.  
• Titles are used as user-defined clip names on this unit.  
Therefore, the available characters are limited to those  
supported by the title function.  
• Files generated along with clips and clip lists use the  
same names (the “C*” or “E*” part of the following file  
names).  
10Repeat steps 8 and 9 as required.  
When you are setting the “NUMERIC” item, you can  
press the RESET button to return the initial value of  
the serial number to 00001 (factory default setting).  
- Clips: Metadata files (C*M01.XML), proxy AV data  
files (C*S01.MXF)  
11Carry out steps 7 to 10 to set the other item.  
- Clip lists: Metadata files (E*M01.XML)  
• The following names cannot be assigned.  
- Clips:C0000.MXF  
12Press the SET button.  
The title is saved.  
- Clip lists: E0000E01.SMI, E0100E01.SMI to  
E9999E01.SMI, E0000.SMI, E0100.SMI to  
E9999.SMI  
• The following names should be avoided.  
- Clips: C5000.MXF to C9999.MXF  
- Clip lists: E0001.SMI to E0099.SMI  
To check the titles of recorded clips  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  
screen, and select the clip whose title you want to check.  
The title of the selected clip appears at the upper left of the  
screen.  
information about the thumbnail screen.  
To assign clip names on this unit  
The title assigned to clip becomes its clip name (file  
name).  
Notes  
• The value of the serial number is incremented by 1 every  
time a title is generated. When the value reaches 99999,  
the next number restarts from 00001.  
• Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the  
serial number after recording several clips or the same is  
true depending on the value setting. Care should be taken  
when setting the serial number.  
Notes  
• When the first letter of the title setting with basic menu  
item 035 “CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT” is a space  
or period (.), the clip name is the title string minus the  
first letter.  
• An FTP client that supports UTF-8 is required to use  
Unicode characters other than ASCII characters.  
Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF-  
8.  
• The “PREFIX” setting is saved in memory banks, but the  
“NUMERIC” setting is not saved (see page 96).  
76  
6-1 Overview  
       
6
With the STOP button held down, rotate the jog dial or  
the shuttle dial to move the “*” to the left of “AUTO  
NAMING.”  
C0001.MXF  
TITLE00001  
7
8
With the SHUTTLE button held down, rotate the jog  
dial or the shuttle dial to select “title.”  
Press the SET button.  
The same name will now be given to newly recorded  
clips.  
When the “AUTO NAMING” sub item of basic menu item  
036 is set to “C****”  
To use clips and clip lists with user-defined  
names over FAM and FTP connections  
Carry out steps 2 to 5 of “To assign clip names on this  
unit,” and then press the SET button.  
It is now possible to write, transfer, and rename clips and  
clip lists with user-defined names over file access mode  
(FAM) connections (see page 78) and FTP connections  
TITLE00001.MXF  
TITLE00001  
When the “AUTO NAMING” sub item of basic menu item  
036 is set to “title”  
Fuji.MXF  
1
Before you start, set the “TITLE” sub item of basic  
menu item 035 “CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT” to  
“enable,” and set a title (see the previous section).  
Able to use clips with user-defined names over FAM and FTP  
connections  
2
3
Press the MENU button.  
Rotate the jog dial or the shuttle dial to display menu  
item 036.  
Sakura.SMI  
4
With the STOP button held down, rotate the jog dial or  
the shuttle dial to move the “*” to the left of the item  
names to “NAMING FORM.”  
Able to use clip lists with user-defined names over FAM and FTP  
connections  
The “*” indicates the selected item.  
ITEM-036  
To check clip names  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  
screen, and select the clip whose name you want to check.  
The name of the selected clip appears at the upper left of  
the screen.  
FILE NAMING  
* NAMING FORM  
AUTO NAMING  
END  
- C****  
- C****  
information about the thumbnail screen.  
Notes  
• The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed  
according to the following order of priority.  
Title > User-defined clip name > Standard format clip  
name  
5
With the SHUTTLE button held down, rotate the jog  
dial or the shuttle dial to select “free.”  
Therefore, the display of this item changes as following,  
depending on whether there is a title.  
- When a title has been set as a clip name on this unit,  
for clips recorded on this unit, the title is displayed.  
You are now able to use clips and clip lists with user-  
defined names.  
6-1 Overview  
77  
- The user-defined name or standard format name is  
displayed for clips without a title.  
• If the firmware of your XDCAM device is version 1.4x  
or lower, clips with user-defined names appear as  
“C5000” to “C9999,” in order of recording.  
6-2File Access Mode File  
Operations  
File access mode operating environment  
Operating system requirements for file operations by file  
access mode (called FAM below) are as follows.  
• Computer operating system: Microsoft Windows 2000  
Service Pack 4 or higher, or Microsoft Windows XP  
Preparations  
Do the following on the remote computer and this unit.  
• Install the FAM driver on the remote computer (see the  
next section).  
• Set extended menu item 215 “i.LINK MODE” to  
“FAM.”  
more information about how to make this setting.  
To install the FAM driver  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing  
Software) in the CD-ROM drive of the computer and  
execute the Setup.exe file, then follow the installation  
instructions.  
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD-  
ROM disc.  
Note  
Use Version 1.4 or higher of the FAM driver. The FAM  
driver on the supplied CD-ROM is Version 1.4 or higher.  
If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer,  
check the version.  
To check the version, click “Add or Remove Programs”  
(Windows XP) or “Add/Remove Programs” (Windows  
2000), select “ProDisc,” and then click “Click here for  
support information.”  
6-2-1 Making FAM Connections  
1
If there is a disc loaded in this unit, put the unit into the  
following state.  
• Recording, playback, search and other disc  
operations (see page 16): Stopped  
• THUMBNAIL button (see page 13): Off  
• Disc access by DELETE, FORMAT, and so on in  
the System menu (see page 117): Stopped  
• Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear  
• Extended menu item 258 “LIVE LOGGING”: off  
78  
6-2 File Access Mode File Operations  
         
2
3
If this unit is connected to a remote computer by FTP,  
log out from the FTP session (see page 80).  
To eject discs from a remote computer  
Right click the icon representing this unit in Explorer, and  
select Eject from the menu which appears.  
Connect the S400 (i.LINK) connector on this unit to  
the i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the remote  
computer, using an i.LINK cable (see connections  
illustration on page 27).  
6-2-3 Exiting File Operations  
Note  
Windows recognizes this unit as a removable disc, and  
displays one of the following icons on the remote  
computer’s task bar:  
Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to 3.  
1
Do one of the following on the  
displayed in the remote computer’s taskbar.  
or  
icon  
Windows 2000:  
Windows XP:  
• Double click.  
• Right click, and select one of the following  
commands from the menu which appears.  
- Windows 2000: Unplug or eject hardware  
- Windows XP: Safely Remove Hardware  
The remote computer is now able to perform file  
operations when a disc is inserted into this unit.  
Note  
You will not be able to log in if you put the unit into  
the state described in step 1 after connecting the cable.  
To log in, disconnect the cable, put the unit into the  
state described in step 1, and connect it again.  
Windows 2000: The Unplug or Eject Hardware  
dialog appears.  
Windows XP: The Safely Remove Hardware dialog  
appears.  
Operation limitations during FAM connections  
• Control panel and LCD panel operations are disabled,  
except for operations with the EJECT and STATUS  
buttons.  
• This unit cannot be controlled from devices connected to  
the REMOTE connector (D-sub 9-pin) and S400  
(i.LINK) connector.  
2
3
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-R1 IEEE 1394 SBP2  
Device” and click Stop.  
The Stop a Hardware device dialog appears.  
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-R1 IEEE 1394 SBP2  
Device” and click OK.  
• Signal input to this unit and signal output from this unit  
are stopped.  
Windows 2000: A confirmation message appears.  
Windows XP: “Sony XDCAM PDW-R1 IEEE  
1394 SBP2 Device” is deleted from the Hardware  
devices list.  
6-2-2 Operating on Files  
1
2
Start Explorer.  
This unit can now resume normal operations. (The  
limitations described in “Operation limitations during  
FAM connections” (see page 79) no longer apply.)  
Check that a drive letter has been assigned to this unit.  
(The drive letter will differ depending on the number  
of other peripherals connected to the remote  
computer.)  
4
Disconnect the i.LINK cable as required.  
To reconnect  
To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one of the  
following, depending on whether an i.LINK cable is  
connected.  
i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit and a  
remote computer with an i.LINK cable.  
i.LINK cable is connected: Disconnect the i.LINK cable  
from either this unit or the remote computer, wait for  
at least 10 seconds, and then reconnect the  
disconnected cable.  
Use Explorer to perform file operations on the disc  
loaded in this unit.  
You can operate in the same way that you operate on  
local drives and files on network computers.  
Notes  
• If you power this unit off during an FAM  
connection, the data transferred thus far is discarded.  
• All file operations are not possible for some types of  
files.  
The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is  
connected: Power the unit on.  
6-2 File Access Mode File Operations  
79  
     
To disable FAM connections  
Execute one of the procedures described in the previous  
section “Reconnecting” to make a FAM connection  
between this unit and the remote computer. To disable  
FAM connections, set extended menu item 215 “i.LINK  
MODE” to “AV/C.”  
6-3FTP File Operations  
File operations between this unit and a remote computer  
can be carried out by the File Transfer Protocol (called  
FTP below).  
For more information about how to make this setting, see  
Preparations  
1
Connect the network connectors of this unit and a  
remote computer with a network cable (see  
connections illustration on page 26). Or connect this  
unit to the network to which the remote computer is  
connected (see connections illustration on page 26).  
2
Set the IP address and other network setting items for  
this unit.  
115).  
If network settings have already been made  
Check the IP address of this unit.  
3
Set the remote control switch to “NETWORK” (see  
6-3-1 Making FTP Connections  
FTP connections between this unit and a remote computer  
can be made with either of the following.  
• The command prompt  
• FTP client software  
This section explains how to use the command prompt. For  
more information about using FTP client software, refer to  
the documentation of the FTP client software on your  
system.  
Note  
An FTP client that supports UTF-8 is required to use  
Unicode characters other than ASCII characters.  
Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF-8.  
To log in  
If this unit is connected to a remote computer with a FAM  
connection, first exit file operations on the FAM  
connection (see page 79).  
1
Load a disc into this unit and put the unit into the  
following state.  
80  
6-3 FTP File Operations  
       
• Recording, playback, search and other disc  
operations (see page 16): Stopped  
• THUMBNAIL button (see page 13): Off  
• Disc access by DELETE, FORMAT, and so on in  
the System menu (see page 117): Stopped  
• Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear  
• Extended menu item 258 “LIVE LOGGING”: off  
Note  
Login is not possible unless a disc is loaded and the  
unit is in the state described above.  
2
3
Start the command prompt.  
Enter “ftp <SP> <IP address>,” and press the Enter  
key. (<SP> refers to a space.)  
For example, if the IP address of this unit is set to  
“192.168.001.010,” enter “ftp 192.168.1.10.”  
Refer to the Windows help for more information about  
the FTP command.  
If the connection succeeds, you are prompted to enter  
a user name.  
4
5
Enter the user name “admin” and press the Enter key.  
When the user name is verified, you are prompted to  
enter a password.  
Enter the password and press the Enter key.  
The password is set to “pdw-r1” when the unit is  
shipped from the factory.  
The login is complete when the password is verified.  
protocol commands supported by this unit.  
If the connection times out  
This unit terminates FTP connections if no command  
is received within 90 seconds of the last command. If  
this occurs, log out (see the next section) and repeat  
steps 2 to 4.  
Note  
If you power this unit off during an FTP connection,  
the data transferred thus far is discarded.  
To log out  
To log out after finishing file operations, enter “QUIT” at  
the command prompt and press the Enter key.  
6-3 FTP File Operations  
81  
6-3-2 Command List  
The FTP protocol commands supported by this unit  
include standard commands (see the next section) and  
extended commands (see page 86).  
Notes  
• To execute FTP commands, you must install application  
software such as PDZ-1 on your computer.  
• The commands supported by application software vary.  
Standard commands  
The following table shows the standard FTP commands  
supported by this unit.  
In the command syntax column, <SP> means a space,  
entered by pressing the space bar, and <CRLF> means a  
new line, entered by pressing the Enter key.  
Command name  
Description  
Command syntax  
USER  
Send this command to begin the login USER <SP> <username> <CRLF>  
process.  
Input example: USER admin  
PASS  
QUIT  
PORT  
After sending the USER command,  
send this command to complete the  
login process.  
PASS <SP> <password> <CRLF>  
Input example: PASS pdw-r1  
Terminates the FTP connection. If a file QUIT <CRLF>  
is being transferred, terminates after  
completion of the transfer.  
Specifies the IP address and port to  
which this unit should connect for the  
next file transfer (for data transfer from  
this unit).  
PORT <SP> <h1,h2,h3,h4,p1,p2> <CRLF>  
• h1 (most significant byte) to h4 (least significant byte): IP  
address  
• p1 (most significant byte), p2 (least significant byte): Port  
address  
Input example: PORT 10,0,0,1,242,48  
(IP address: 10.0.0.1, Port number: 62000)  
PASV  
TYPE  
This command requests this unit to  
“listen” on a data port (which is not its  
default data port). (It puts this unit into  
passive mode, waiting for the remote  
computer to make a data connection.)  
PASV <CRLF>  
Specifies the type of data to be  
transferred.  
TYPE <SP> <type-code (options delimited by <SP>)>  
<CRLF>  
<type-code> can be any of the following. However, for  
XDCAM, data is always transferred as “I,” regardless of the  
type-code specification.  
• A: ASCII  
- N: Non-print  
- T: Telnet format  
- C: ASA Carriage Control  
• E: EBCDIC  
- N: Non-print  
- T: Telnet format  
- C: ASA Carriage Control  
• I: IMAGE (Binary) (default)  
• L: LOCAL BYTE  
- SIZE: byte size  
Input example: TYPE I  
82  
6-3 FTP File Operations  
   
Command name  
Description  
Command syntax  
STRU  
Specifies the data structure.  
STRU <SP> <structure-code> <CRLF>  
<structure-code> can be any of the following. However, for  
XDCAM, the structure is always “F,” regardless of the  
structure-code specification.  
• F: File structure (default)  
• R: Record structure  
• P: Page structure  
Input example: STRU F  
MODE  
Specifies the transfer mode.  
MODE <SP> <mode-code> <CRLF>  
<mode-code> can be any of the following. However, for  
XDCAM, the mode is always “S,” regardless of the mode-  
code specification.  
• S: Stream mode (default)  
• B: Block mode  
• C: Compressed mode  
Input example: MODE S  
LIST  
Sends a list of files from this unit to the LIST <SP> <options> <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
remote computer.  
<options> can be any of the following.  
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “.”  
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.  
The following data is transferred, depending on whether  
<path-name> specifies a directory or file.  
• Directory specified: A list of the files in the specified  
directory  
• File specified: Information about the specified file  
• No specification: A list of the files in the current directory  
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?” (any  
character) may be used in <path-name>.  
Input example 1: LIST -a Clip  
Input example 2: LIST Clip/*.MXF  
NLST  
Sends a list of file names from this unit NLST <SP> <options or path-name> <CRLF>  
to the remote computer, with no other  
information.  
The following options may be specified when no path name  
is specified.  
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “.”  
• -l: Display information other than file name (gives the same  
result as the LIST command).  
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.  
The following data is transferred, depending on whether  
<path-name> specifies a directory or file.  
• Directory specified: A list of the file names only in the  
specified directory  
• No specification: A list of the file names only in the current  
directory.  
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?” (any  
character) may be used in <path-name>.  
Input example 1: NLST -l  
Input example 2: NLST Clip/*.MXF  
RETR  
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the RETR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
specified path on this unit to the current  
directory on the remote computer.  
Input example: RETR Clip/C0001.MXF  
6-3 FTP File Operations  
83  
Command name  
Description  
Command syntax  
STOR  
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the STOR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
specified path on the remote computer  
to the current directory on this unit.  
Depending on the type of file  
transferred, the following files are  
created.  
Input example: STOR Edit/E0001E01.SMI  
a) c)  
• C*.MXF file  
- C*M01.XML file (metadata)  
- C*S01.MXF file (proxy AV data)  
b) c)  
• E*E01.SMI file  
- E*M01.XML file (metadata)  
a) *: 0001 to 4999  
b) *: 0001 to 0099  
c)With firmware version 1.5 and higher,  
the unit can handle files with user-  
defined names in the “C*” or “E*E01”  
part.  
Notes  
• For C*.MXF files, the UMID of the  
copy source file is not saved.  
However, it is saved if an immediately  
preceding SITE UMMD extended  
command has been issued.  
• For C*.MXF files, some data, such as  
file header metadata, may be  
missing.  
• Depending on the transfer  
destination directory and the file type,  
transfer may not be possible.  
RNFR  
RNTO  
Rename a file. Specify the file to be  
renamed with the RNFR command,  
and specify the new name with the  
RNTO command. (Always follow a  
RNFR command with a RNTO  
command.)  
RNFR <SP> <path-name (before change)> <CRLF>  
RNTO <SP> <path-name (after change)> <CRLF>  
Input example:  
RNFR General/info.txt  
RNTO General/clip_info.txt  
DELE  
Deletes the specified file on this unit.  
DELE <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
Input example: DELE Clip/C0099.MXF  
Note  
Depending on the directory and file  
type, deletion may not be possible.  
84  
6-3 FTP File Operations  
Command name  
Description  
Command syntax  
STAT  
Sends information about properties of STAT <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
the specified file, or about data transfer  
status, from this unit to the remote  
computer.  
The following property information is  
sent, depending on the file type.  
• MXF file  
The following data is transferred, depending on whether a file  
is specified with <path-name>.  
• File specified: The properties of the specified file  
• No specification: The size of the data transferred thus far  
(unit: bytes)  
- File name  
- File type  
Input example: STAT Clip/C0001.MXF  
- CODEC type  
- Frame rate  
- Number of audio channels  
- Duration  
- UMID  
• non-MXF file  
- File name  
ABOR  
Requests this unit to abort a file  
transfer currently in progress.  
ABOR <CRLF>  
SYST  
HELP  
Displays the system name of this unit. SYST <CRLF>  
Displays a list of the commands  
HELP <SP> <command-name> <CRLF>  
supported by this unit, or an  
explanation of the specified command. The following data is transferred, depending on whether a  
command name is specified with <command-name>.  
• Command name specified: Explanation of the specified  
command.  
• No specification: Command list  
Input example: HELP RETR  
NOOP  
Does nothing except return a response. NOOP <CRLF>  
(Used to check whether this unit is  
running.)  
PWD  
CWD  
Displays the current directory (“/” if the PWD <CRLF>  
directory is the root directory).  
Changes the current directory (moves CWD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
from the current directory to another  
directory).  
Moves to a directory as follows, depending on whether a  
directory is specified with <path-name>.  
• Directory specified: To the specified directory  
• No specification: To the root directory  
Input example: CWD General  
CDUP <CRLF>  
CDUP  
MKD  
Moves one level up in the directory  
structure (makes the parent of the  
current directory be the current  
directory).  
Creates a new directory.  
MKD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
RMD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
Note  
Directories can be created only in the  
General directory.  
RMD  
Deletes a directory.  
Note  
Directories can be deleted only in the  
General directory.  
6-3 FTP File Operations  
85  
Extended commands  
The following table shows the extended FTP commands  
supported by this unit.  
In the Command syntax column, <SP> means a space,  
entered by pressing the space bar, and <CRLF> means a  
new line, entered by pressing the Enter key.  
Command name  
Description  
Command syntax  
SITE REPF  
Sends an MXF file from the specified  
path on this unit to the remote  
SITE REPF <SP> <path-name> <SP> <start-frame> <SP>  
<transfer-size> <CRLF>  
computer. This command allows you to  
specify a segment in the body of the  
<start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of the file.  
MXF file (composed of video and audio Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset (the first  
data), for transfer of the required  
segment only.  
frame is 0).  
<transfer-size> specifies the number of video frames to  
transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file).  
Notes  
Input example: SITE REPF Clip/C0001.MXF 5 150 (Transfer  
C0001.MXF. Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to  
frame 155.)  
• A segment greater than the file size  
cannot be specified.  
• This command cannot be used when  
the path names contains a space.  
Use the SITE REPFL command  
instead.  
a)  
Sends an MXF file from the specified  
path on this unit to the remote  
SITE REPFL <SP> “<path-name>” <SP> <start-frame>  
<SP> <transfer-size> <CRLF>  
SITE REPFL  
computer. This command allows you to  
specify a segment in the body of the  
<path-name> specifies the path name of the file to transfer.  
MXF file (composed of video and audio Enclose the path name in double quotation marks.  
data), for transfer of the required  
segment only.  
<start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of the file.  
Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset (the first  
frame is 0).  
<transfer-size> specifies the number of video frames to  
transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file).  
Note  
A segment greater than the file size  
cannot be specified.  
Input example: SITE REPFL “Clip/sakura 0001.MXF” 5 150  
(Transfer sakura 0001.MXF. Body data is transferred only  
from frame 6 to frame 155.)  
SITE FSTS  
Acquires the system status of this unit. SITE FSTS <CRLF>  
One of the following status codes is  
sent.  
0: Initial state, or no disc is loaded.  
1: File system mount is OK.  
3: File system mount is not OK.  
SITE MEID  
SITE FUNC  
Acquires the media ID of the disc  
loaded in this unit.  
SITE MEID <CRLF>  
Acquires the function and version of the SITE FUNC <CRLF>  
extended commands.  
Information is sent in the following  
format.  
<main function> <SP> <branch  
function> <SP> <branch function  
version>  
For XDCAM, sent in a format like “200  
MXF DISK 1” (“200” is a response  
code).  
SITE UMMD  
When C*.MXF file is sent with the  
STOR command, the copy source  
UMID is saved if this command is  
invoked immediately before the STOR  
command.  
SITE UMMD <CRLF>  
a)  
Acquires the amount of free disc space. SITE DF <CRLF>  
SITE DF  
86  
6-3 FTP File Operations  
 
Command name  
Description  
Command syntax  
a)  
Locks and unlocks clips. Also sets  
permissions for directories and files in  
the General directory.  
SITE CHMOD <SP> <flag> <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>  
SITE CHMOD  
Specify one of the following values in <flag>, according to  
the specification in <path-name>.  
• When a clip is specified in <path-name>  
444: Lock.  
666: Unlock.  
• When a directory in the General directory is specified in  
<path-name>  
555: Forbid writing to the directory.  
777: Allow writing to the directory.  
• When a file in the General directory is specified in <path-  
name>  
444: Forbid writing to and execution of the file.  
555: Forbid writing to the file, but allow execution.  
666: Allow writing to the file, but forbid execution.  
777: Allow writing to and execution of the file.  
Input example: SITE CHMOD 444 Clip/C0001.MXF (Lock  
clip C0001.MXF)  
a) This is supported from firmware version 1.5.  
6-3 FTP File Operations  
87  
6-4Recording  
Continuous Time  
Code With FAM and  
FTP Connections  
When you are connected to the unit by FAM or FTP, you  
can create new clips with time code that is continuous with  
the time code of the last frame of the last clip on the disc.  
To record continuous time code, first set the INT/EXT/  
RP188 switch to INT, set the PRESET/REGEN switch to  
REGEN, and set extended menu item 629 “TC SELECT”  
to “tc.” Then proceed as follows.  
Note  
Continuous time code cannot be recorded if extended  
menu item 629 “TC SELECT” is set to “vitc.”  
more information about how to make extended menu  
settings.  
FAM connection  
Write clip files to the unit from the computer or other  
device that is connected to this unit.  
FTP connection  
Use the “STOR” command to transfer clip files from the  
computer that is connected to this unit.  
If you issue the “SITE UMMD” command immediately  
before the “STOR” command, the original time code of the  
transferred file is recorded, regardless of the settings of the  
INT/EXT/RP188 switch and the PRESET/REGEN switch.  
88  
6-4 Recording Continuous Time Code With FAM and FTP Connections  
   
Menus  
7
Chapter  
Item group  
Function  
Refer to  
7-1Menu System  
Configuration  
Items  
H01 to H15  
Display of the total number of  
hours the unit has been  
powered on, and other  
information collected by the  
digital hours meter  
The settings for this unit use the following menus.  
• Setup menu  
See the next item.  
Items  
001 to 099  
Settings relating to the preroll  
time, superimposed text  
information, switching between  
525(U) line, 525(J) line and  
625 line operation modes, etc.  
Maintenance menu  
This provides audio control, and network and setup  
menu settings, and also shows version information.  
System menu  
This provides disc formatting, date setting, and similar  
operations.  
Items  
B01 to B20  
Settings relating to the menu  
banks for saving menu settings  
Configuration of the extended setup menu  
The extended setup menu comprises the following groups  
of items.  
Item group  
Function  
Refer to  
Setup menu  
Items  
100 to 199  
Settings relating to control  
panels  
The setup menu system of this unit comprises the basic  
setup menu (also referred to simply as “basic menu”) and  
extended setup menu (also referred to simply as “extended  
menu”).  
Basic menu  
This menu is used to make settings relating, for example,  
Items  
200 to 299  
Settings relating to the remote page 98  
control interface  
Items  
300 to 399  
Settings relating to editing  
operations  
Items  
400 to 499  
Settings relating to preroll  
to the following.  
- the digital hours meter  
- the preroll time  
- the text information superimposed on the video output  
to the monitor  
- the menu banks for retaining menu settings  
Extended menu  
This menu is used to make a wide range of settings  
relating to the functions of this unit, for example, the  
control panel functions, video and audio control, and  
digital data processing.  
Items  
500 to 599  
Settings relating to disc  
protection  
Items  
600 to 699  
Settings relating to the time  
code, metadata, and UMID  
Items  
700 to 799  
Settings relating to video  
control  
Items  
800 to 899  
Settings relating to audio  
control  
Items  
900 to 999  
Settings relating to digital  
processing  
Configuration of the basic setup menu  
The basic setup menu comprises the following groups of  
items.  
7-1 Menu System Configuration  
89  
           
7-2 Basic Setup Menu  
7-2-1 Items in the Basic Setup Menu  
The basic menu items (excluding the items related to the  
digital hours meter) are listed in the following table.  
• Item names are the names which appear in the video  
panel and on an external monitor, when the input signals  
to the monitor are the video signals output from the  
VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector.  
An abbreviated name appears in the time data display  
section when you press the NEXT button.  
• The values in the Settings column are the values which  
appear in the time data display section. (The values may  
appear in a different format in the video panel and on an  
external monitor. In this case, the video panel values are  
shown in parentheses.) Underlined values are the factory  
defaults.  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
001  
002  
PREROLL TIME  
0 s (0 sec)... 5 s (5 sec)... 30 s (30 sec): Set the preroll time to between 0  
and 30 seconds in steps of 1 second.  
A preroll time of at least 5 seconds is recommended when using this  
unit for editing.  
CHARACTER H-POSITION  
Adjust the horizontal screen position (as a hexadecimal value) of the text  
a)  
information displayed on the monitor.  
00... 0A ...2A (525(U)/525(J) line modes) /00... 09 ...29 (625 line mode):  
The hexadecimal value 00 is for the far left of the screen. Increasing the  
value moves the position of the characters to the right.  
a) Video panel and external monitor (when the input signals to the monitor are the  
video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector)  
Set this item by adjusting to the required position while viewing the monitor.  
Adjust the vertical screen position (as a hexadecimal value) of the text  
information displayed on the monitor.  
003  
CHARACTER V-POSITION  
a)  
00... 2E ...38 (525(U)/525(J) line modes)/00... 37 ...43 (625 line mode):  
The hexadecimal value 00 is for the top of the screen. Increasing the  
value lowers the position of the characters.  
a) Video panel and external monitor (when the input signals to the monitor are the  
video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector)  
Set this item by adjusting to the required position while viewing the monitor.  
a)  
005  
DISPLAY INFORMATION  
SELECT  
Determine the kind of text information to be displayed on the monitor.  
off (display off): Do not output text information.  
T&sta (time data & status) : Time data and the units status.  
T&UB (time data & UB): Time data and user bit data. (When UB (user bit  
data) is selected with the COUNTER SEL button, the user bit data and  
time data arranged in that order are displayed.)  
T&CNT (time data & CNT): Time data and counter count. (When  
COUNTER is selected with the COUNTER SEL button, the counter  
count and time data arranged in that order are displayed.)  
T&T (time data & time data): Time data and time code (TC or VITC).  
T&clp (time data & clip name): Time code and clip name  
time (time data only): Time data only.  
a) Video panel and external monitor (when the input signals to the monitor are the  
video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector)  
90  
7-2 Basic Setup Menu  
             
Item number Item name  
Settings  
006  
LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE  
Determine which recording and playback control buttons on the control  
panel are enabled when this unit is controlled from external equipment.  
dis (all disable): All buttons and switches are disabled.  
st&ej (stop & eject) : Only the STOP button and EJECT button are enabled.  
ena (all enable): All buttons and switches are enabled.  
007  
009  
TAPE TIMER DISPLAY  
CHARACTER TYPE  
Determine whether to display the counter in 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode.  
+ –12H (+ /–12H) : 12-hour mode  
24H: 24-hour mode  
Determine the type of characters such as time code displayed on the  
a)  
monitor.  
white: White letters on a black background.  
black: Black letters on a white background.  
W/out: White letters with black outline.  
B/out: Black letters with white outline.  
a) Video panel and external monitor (when the input signals to the monitor are the  
video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector)  
Set this item by selecting the required type while viewing the monitor.  
Determine the vertical size of characters such as time code displayed on the  
monitor.  
011  
CHARACTER V-SIZE  
a)  
×1  
:Standard size  
×2 :2 times standard size  
a) Video panel and external monitor (when the input signals to the monitor are the  
video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector)  
Set this item by selecting the required size while viewing the monitor.  
a)  
012  
013  
CONDITION DISPLAY ON  
VIDEO MONITOR  
Select whether to display disc condition marks on the monitor.  
dis (disable): Do not display.  
ena (enable): Display.  
a) Video panel and external monitor (when the input signals to the monitor are the  
video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector)  
525/625 SYSTEM SELECT  
Specify whether to enable switching between 525(U) line, 525(J) line and  
625 line modes.  
off: Do not enable system switching.  
on: Enable system switching.  
For the switching between 525(U)/525(J)/625 line modes, see page 95.  
Note  
When you switch line modes, all basic menu and extended menu items are  
set to the factory defaults for the selected line mode.  
a)  
015  
LCD CHARACTER TYPE  
Specify the type of characters used to display information on the monitor  
when the STATUS button is pressed.  
W/out: White letters with black outline.  
white: White letters on a black background.  
a) Video panel and external monitor (when the input signals to the monitor are the  
video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector)  
Set this item by selecting the required type while viewing the monitor.  
7-2 Basic Setup Menu  
91  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
016  
ALARM DISPLAY  
Select whether or not to display alarm messages.  
off: Do not display alarm messages. (However, certain important alarms are  
displayed).  
limit (on (limited)): Display only a minimum number of alarm messages.  
on: Display all alarm messages.  
For details about alarm message display conditions, see 8-4-1 “Alarm List”  
017  
SUB STATUS DISPLAY SELECT Determine the kind of sub status information to be displayed on the  
a)  
monitor.  
off: Do not output sub status information.  
rmain (disc remain): Available disc space (unit: minute)  
clip (clip no): Order of playback of the selected clip/total number of clips  
posi (playback position): Playback position within clip  
pbr (playback remain): The remaining playback time of the selected clip  
from the current playback position (hours:minutes:seconds:frames).  
a) Video panel and external monitor (when the input signals to the monitor are the  
video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector)  
Note  
When menu item 005 is set to “off,” sub status information is not displayed  
when this item is set to anything other than “off.”  
a)  
024  
MENU CHARACTER TYPE  
Determine the type of characters in menu text displayed on the monitor.  
white: White letters on a black background.  
black: Black letters on a white background.  
W/out: White letters with black outline.  
B/out: Black letters with white outline.  
a) Video panel and external monitor (when the input signals to the monitor are the  
video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector)  
Set this item by selecting the required type while viewing the monitor.  
029  
STORED OWNERSHIP  
Specify whether to enable changing UMID ownership information settings  
(COUNTRY, ORGANIZATION and USER).  
off: Do not enable.  
on: Enable.  
See 7-3-3 “Using UMID Data” (page 109) for more information about UMID.  
031  
032  
034  
RECORDING FORMAT  
LCD MONITOR MODE  
Select the recording format.  
IMX50 (IMX 50Mbps): MPEG IMX 50 Mbps  
IMX40 (IMX 40Mbps): MPEG IMX 40 Mbps  
IMX30 (IMX 30Mbps): MPEG IMX 30 Mbps  
DVCAM: DVCAM  
Set the aspect ratio for the video panel.  
auto: the aspect ratio of the display screen automatically adjusts to the  
aspect ratio of the input material.  
16:9: set the aspect ratio to 16:9.  
4:3: set the aspect ratio to 4:3.  
MENU STATUS DISPLAY ON  
VIDEO MONITOR  
Specify whether to display the setup menu status at the left edge of the  
status display line when basic menu item 005 “DISPLAY INFORMATION  
SELECT” is set to “T&sta.”  
dis (disable): Do not display.  
ena (enable): Display. (The display is visible only when no disc is loaded,  
and during insertion and ejection of a disc.)  
92  
7-2 Basic Setup Menu  
Item number Item name  
035 CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT  
Settings  
Specify whether or not to allow user definition of the titles assigned to clips.  
off: Do not allow assignment.  
on: Allow assignment.  
information about assigning titles.  
Sub-item  
1
TITLE  
Specify whether to assign titles to recorded clips.  
disable: Do not assign titles to clips.  
enable: Assign titles to clips.  
2
PREFIX  
Set the prefix of the title (up to 10 characters). The allowable characters are  
alphanumeric characters, symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) + , - . ; = @ [ ] ^ _ { } ~), and  
the space character.  
TITLE  
3
NUMERIC  
Set the initial value of the numeric part of the title (00001 to 99999, five-digit  
number).  
00001  
a)  
036  
FILE NAMING  
Specify whether to allow use of clip and clip list files with user-defined  
names.  
details about how to make the settings.  
Sub-item  
1
2
NAMING FORM  
Specify the clip and clip list naming format. (Specify whether to allow use of  
files with user-defined names.)  
C****: Standard format (Do not allow use of files with user-defined names)  
free: Free format (Allow use of files with user-defined names)  
AUTO NAMING  
When “free” is selected under the sub-item “NAMING FORM,specify  
whether to use the standard format name or the same name as the title for  
clips recorded on this unit.  
C****: Use the standard format for clip names.  
title: Use the title set in basic menu item 035 “CLIP TITLE NAMING  
SELECT” for clip names.  
B01  
B02  
B03  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B20  
RECALL SETUP BANK-1  
RECALL SETUP BANK-2  
RECALL SETUP BANK-3  
SAVE SETUP BANK-1  
SAVE SETUP BANK-2  
SAVE SETUP BANK-3  
RESET SETUP MENU  
Set to “on” to recall menu settings from menu bank 1.  
Set to “on” to recall menu settings from menu bank 2.  
Set to “on” to recall menu settings from menu bank 3.  
Set to “on” to save current menu settings to menu bank 1.  
Set to “on” to save current menu settings to menu bank 2.  
Set to “on” to save current menu settings to menu bank 3.  
Set to “on” to return the settings of the current menu to the factory default  
settings. Set to “bank-4” to set the current menu to the settings saved in  
menu bank 4.  
off  
on (on (default)): Return the current menu to the factory default settings.  
bank-4: Set the current menu to the settings saved in menu bank 4.  
a) This is supported from firmware version 1.5.  
7-2 Basic Setup Menu  
93  
 
7-2-2 Basic Menu Operations  
Display in video panel and on external monitor  
Cursor indicating the currently selected item  
Group name for the currently selected item  
Basic setup menu operations  
This section explains how to select setup menu items and  
how to change their values. The operations are common to  
both the basic menu and the extended menu.  
HOUR METER  
*HO1:OPE HOURS -  
H11:OPE HOURS r-  
109  
109  
Time data display  
Video panel  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
CH  
-
15 CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
Display in time data display  
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
STATUS CHARACTER  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
1,5  
5
4
Item number (flashing)  
Setting  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
THUMB  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
CLIP  
NAIL  
SEL  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
EXT  
REMOTE  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
R-RUN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
To display the item name in the time data display  
Hold down the NEXT button.  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
2
3
Rotate the jog dial or shuttle dial to select a menu item.  
Rotate in the clockwise direction to select higher  
numbers, and in the counterclockwise direction to  
select lower number. The cursor moves in the direction  
of the rotation (the screen scrolls when the cursor  
reaches the top or bottom of the screen). The speed at  
which the cursor moves and speed with which menu  
items change vary with the rotation speed of the jog  
dial or the rotation angle of the shuttle dial.  
The STOP button lights when you select an item that  
contains sub items.  
3
2
NEXT button  
1
Press the MENU button.  
The setup menu appears in the video panel, and on an  
external monitor to which the output of the VIDEO  
OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER) connector is  
input. A cursor indicates the currently selected menu  
item.  
The item number and current setting (elapsed time in  
the case of the digital clock) of the currently selected  
menu item also appear in the time data display section.  
The item number flashes to indicate that you can  
switch to another item.  
When the selected item contains sub items, you can  
select a sub item by holding down the STOP button  
and rotating the jog dial or shuttle dial.  
The displays in the video panel, on an external  
monitor, and in the time data display section change as  
shown below when you hold down the STOP button.  
In the time data display section, the currently selected  
sub item number flashes to indicate that you can  
switch to another sub item.  
94  
7-2 Basic Setup Menu  
         
To abandon making a change  
Press the MENU button before pressing the SET  
Display in video panel and on external monitor  
button.  
Cursor indicating the currently selected sub-item  
The menu display disappears from the video panel, the  
external monitor, and the time data display section  
without the new setting value being saved.  
ITEM-703  
BLANK LINE SELECT  
* ALL LINE  
LINE 12  
-
---  
Resetting the menu settings to their  
factory default values  
- blnk  
To reset the current active menu settings to their factory  
default values, proceed as follows.  
1 3 2  
Display in time data display  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
EXT  
REMOTE  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
R-RUN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
Sub-item number (flashing while changing)  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
4
With the SHUTTLE button held down, rotate the jog  
dial or shuttle dial to change the setting.  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The displays in the video panel, on an external  
monitor, and in the time data display section change as  
shown below when you hold down the SHUTTLE  
button. In the time data display section, the currently  
selected setting value flashes to indicate that you can  
change it to another value.  
The menu appears in the video panel, on an external  
monitor to which the output of the VIDEO OUT 2  
(SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER) connector is input, and  
in the time data display section.  
Press the RESET button.  
Display in video panel and on external monitor  
The message “INITIALIZE ALL ITEMS TO  
FACTORY PRESET VALUES?” appears in the video  
panel and on the external monitor.  
Setting value  
The message “Init setup?” appears in the time data  
display.  
ITEM-001  
PREROLL TIME  
To abandon operations and return to the setup  
menu display  
5 sec  
Press the RESET button again.  
3
Press the SET button.  
The menu settings are reset to their factory default  
settings.  
Display in time data display  
Switching between 525(U) line, 525(J) line  
and 625 line modes (menu item 013)  
To switch between 525(U) line, 525(J) line and 625 line  
operation modes, proceed as follows.  
Setting value (flashing while changing)  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
5
Press the SET button.  
Turn the jog dial or shuttle dial to display menu item  
013 in the time data display.  
This saves the new setting value, and the menu display  
disappears from the video panel, the external monitor,  
and the time data display section.  
7-2 Basic Setup Menu  
95  
 
3
Hold down the SHUTTLE button, and turn the jog dial  
or shuttle dial to set menu item 013 to “on.”  
Recall  
Current active  
menu settings  
4
5
Press the SET button.  
Menu bank 1  
Save  
Hold down the SHUTTLE button, and turn the jog dial  
or shuttle dial to select the line mode 525(U), 525(J) or  
625.  
Recall  
6
7
Press the SET button.  
Menu bank 2  
Save  
Turn the unit off (press the on/standby switch to put  
the unit in the standby state).  
Next time the unit is turned on (when the unit is put in the  
operating state by pressing the on/standby switch), it  
operates in the new mode.  
Recall  
Menu bank 3  
Menu bank 4  
Save  
Menu bank operations (menu items B01 to  
B13)  
This unit allows menu settings to be saved in what are  
termed “menu banks.” Saved sets of menu settings can be  
recalled for use as required.  
Recall  
Save  
To jump to menu item B01  
You can recall any required menu by turning the jog dial  
or shuttle dial after pressing the MENU button.  
If you press the MENU button first, then the COUNTER  
SEL button, you can jump directly to menu item B01 or  
H01. The recalled menu item toggles between B01 and  
H01 every time you press the COUNTER SEL button.  
Note  
The following message appears if the line mode of the  
menu bank that you are about to recall differs from the  
current line mode.  
Display in the video panel and on an external monitor  
ITEM-B01  
Saving the current active menu settings  
Set one of basic menu items B11 “SAVE SETUP BANK-  
1” to B13 “SAVE SETUP BANK-3” to “on,” depending  
on which of the menu banks you wish to save in, then press  
the SET button.  
RECALL SETUP BANK-1  
System will be changed.  
Are you sure you want  
to execute?  
Recalling settings from a menu bank  
Set one of basic menu items B01 “RECALL SETUP  
BANK-1” to B03 “RECALL SETUP BANK-3” to “on,”  
depending on which of the menu banks you wish to recall  
from, then press the SET button.  
EXECUTE : SET KEY  
ABORT  
: MENU KEY  
To recall menu bank 4, select “bank-4” under menu item  
B20 “RESET SETUP MENU.”  
Message in time data display  
Refer to the maintenance manual for more information  
about menu bank 4.  
Press the SET button to recall the settings and switch to the  
line mode saved in the menu bank. When you power the  
unit off and then on again, it will use the line mode and  
settings of the selected bank.  
To cancel the recall, press the MENU button.  
96  
7-2 Basic Setup Menu  
 
7-3 Extended Menu  
7-3-1 Items in the Extended Menu  
The following tables show the items in the extended menu.  
• Item names are the names which appear in the video  
panel, and on an external monitor to which the output of  
the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector is input.  
• The values in the Settings columns are the values which  
appear in the time data display section. (The values may  
appear in a different format in the video panel and on an  
external monitor. In this case, the video panel values are  
shown in parentheses.) Underlined values are the factory  
defaults.  
An abbreviated name appears in the time data display  
section when you press the NEXT button.  
Menu items in the 100s, relating to the control panels  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
101  
105  
107  
108  
SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL  
ENABLE  
Select how the unit enters the shuttle or jog mode.  
dial (dial direct): Press the SHUTTLE or JOG button or, except during  
recording/editing, turn the jog dial or shuttle dial.  
key (via search key): Press the SHUTTLE or JOG button.  
REFERENCE SYSTEM ALARM  
Select whether or not to display a warning when the reference video  
signal is not supplied or is out of phase with the input video signal.  
off: No warning.  
on: Flash the STOP button as a warning.  
REC INHIBIT LAMP FLASHING  
AUTO EE SELECT  
Select whether or not to flash the REC INHI indicator when recording is  
prevented (see “REC INHI (recording inhibited) indicator” on page 18).  
off: Light the REC INHI indicator.  
on: Flash the REC INHI indicator.  
When a disc is inserted, select the operation modes in which input video  
and audio signals are automatically handled in E-E mode.  
S/F/R (stop/f.fwd/f.rev): In stop/fast-forward/fast-reverse modes  
stop: In stop mode  
off: Do not put the unit into E-E mode automatically.  
109  
114  
118  
FORCED EE WHEN DISC UNLOAD When “off” is selected in menu item 108, during disc loading/unloading  
and when no disc is inserted, select whether or not to control the output  
signal PB/EE setting.  
on: Do not control (the signal is always an E-E signal).  
off: Control.  
AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT LEVEL When “moni” is selected in menu item 820, select whether or not to  
control the level of the audio signal output from the AUDIO OUT 1/3, 2/4  
connectors with the volume control knob for the PHONES jack.  
var (variable): Control.  
fixed: Do not control.  
KEY INHIBIT  
Sub-item  
When the KEY INHI switch is set to ON, select which buttons can be  
operated. The following sub-items control different sets of buttons  
independently.  
1
MON./INPUT SEL  
Select whether the AUDIO MONITOR SEL, the AUDIO METER SEL, the  
AUDIO INPUT CH, and the VIDEO INPUT SEL buttons are enabled.  
dis: Disabled.  
ena: Enabled.  
2
CONTROL PANEL  
Select whether all switches and buttons other than the buttons specified  
with sub-item 1 and the MENU button are enabled.  
dis: Disabled.  
ena: Enabled.  
121  
Specify the frame mode for variable speed playback.  
field: Field playback  
FRAME PB MODE  
frame: Frame playback. Compared to field playback, frame playback  
gives still pictures with higher precision.  
7-3 Extended Menu  
97  
           
Menu items in the 100s, relating to the control panels  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
131  
AUDIO VOLUME  
Select whether each of the ALL/CH-1, CH-2 to CH-4 adjustment knobs  
on the control panel is effective to control the audio recording level and  
playback level on each channel or the ALL/CH-1 adjustment knob alone  
functions as a master control to control the audio level on all channels  
together.  
each: Each of the ALL/CH-1, CH-2 to CH-4 adjustment knobs is effective  
to control each channel.  
all: The ALL/CH-1 adjustment knob alone functions as a master control.  
When “all” is selected, the ALL indicator to the right of the ALL/CH-1  
adjustment knob lights up.  
142  
143  
145  
Put the unit into repeat playback mode, or exit from repeat playback  
mode.  
off: Exits from repeat playback mode.  
play: Puts the unit into repeat playback mode.  
REPEAT MODE  
INDEX PICTURE POSITION  
Select the frame of the clip to use as the thumbnail image (index picture)  
when recording.  
0sec to 10sec: Can be set in the range from 0 seconds (first frame of the  
clip) to10 seconds, in units of 1 second.  
MODE KEY ENABLE DURING  
RECORDING  
Specify whether only the STOP button stops recording.  
a)  
ena (all enable): Recording stops when the EJECT button is pressed  
and when the PLAY, STOP, SHUTTLE, and JOG buttons are  
b)  
pressed.  
stop: Recording stops only when the STOP button is pressed.  
a) The disc is ejected after recording stops.  
b) The unit enters stop mode when the PLAY button is pressed, and enters still  
image mode (jog/shuttle mode) when the SHUTTLE or JOG button is pressed.  
146  
POWER SAVE MODE  
Specifies whether to put the unit into power save mode.  
off: Do not put the unit into power save mode.  
on: Put the unit into power save mode. The following operations take  
slightly longer to start in power save mode.  
• Recording, playback, jog and shuttle mode playback, search  
• Display of the thumbnail screen and essence marks  
Menu items in the 200s, relating to the remote control interface  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
214  
REMOTE INTERFACE  
When the remote control switch is set to REMOTE, select the device from  
which to remote-control this unit.  
9PIN: Device connected to the REMOTE connector.  
i.LNK (i.LINK): Device connected to the S400 (i.LINK) connector.  
215  
216  
i.LINK MODE  
Select the connection method for the S400 (i.LINK) connector.  
AV/C: Connect with AV/C.  
FAM (FAM (PC REMOTE)): Connect with FAM.  
PARALLEL RECORDING MODE  
Specifies whether recording of video and audio on this unit should start  
and stop at the same time as recording on a camcorder connected to this  
unit by i.LINK(AV/C).  
off: Do not conduct parallel recording.  
on: Conduct parallel recording.  
257  
NETWORK ENABLE  
Select the remote control switch positions which enable network  
connections.  
net (network): Only when the switch is set to “NETWORK.”  
n&9P (network & remote(9PIN)): When the switch is set to  
“NETWORK,” and when the switch is set to “REMOTE” and extended  
a)  
menu item 214 is set to “9PIN.”  
a) FTP connections can be made only when the device connected to the REMOTE  
connector (D-sub 9 pin) is in stop mode. During FTP connections, the device  
connected to the REMOTE connector cannot be used to control this unit.  
98  
7-3 Extended Menu  
   
Menu items in the 200s, relating to the remote control interface  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
258  
Enable or disable the live logging function when using the PDZ-1 Proxy  
LIVE LOGGING  
Browsing Software.  
off: Disable.  
on: Enable.  
Note  
During live logging, regardless of the settings of the switches (INT/EXT/  
RP188, PRESET/REGEN, and F-RUN/R-RUN) in the time data settings  
section, the internal time code generator always runs in free run mode.  
Time code cannot be recorded in internal preset mode.  
Menu items in the 300s, relating to editing operations  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
308  
SELECTION OF STD/NON-STD  
FOR COMPOSITE VIDEO IN  
Select the STD or NON-STD mode in accordance with a composite  
video or S-video input.  
STD (forced STD): The STD mode is always used (forced STD mode).  
N-STD (forced non-STD): Use this setting when the input video signal is  
unstable (forced NON-STD mode).  
Note  
When using a VCR with no built-in time base corrector (e.g. a home-use  
VHS-system VCR), select N-STD.  
310  
320  
REC INHIBIT  
Select whether recording is inhibited.  
off: Do not inhibit recording.  
on: Inhibit recording.  
DIGITAL AUDIO PB PROCESS ON Select the treatment of audio playback at edit points.  
EDIT POINT  
cut: Carry out a cut (possibly resulting in audio discontinuities at the edit  
point).  
fade: Fade out and fade in.  
335  
OUTPUT REFERENCE SEL  
Select the reference signal of this unit.  
ref (ref. video): Use the signal input to the REF VIDEO IN connector as  
the reference signal.  
auto: According to the operation mode, automatically select either the  
signal input to the REF VIDEO IN connector or the input video signal  
selected with the VIDEO INPUT SEL button as the reference signal.  
For more details, see the following item “External synchronization to  
The input digital audio signals and video signals must be synchronized  
with the reference signal input to the REF VIDEO IN connector.  
7-3 Extended Menu  
99  
 
External synchronization to reference signal generators  
The internal reference signal generator is synchronized  
either to a reference signal input to the REF VIDEO IN  
connector or an input video signal. Depending on the  
settings of extended menu items 335 and 308, and the input  
signal selection, the external synchronization status is as  
shown in the following table.  
The video signals are output always synchronized to the  
internal reference signal.  
VIDEO INPUT SEL button setting  
Item 335 setting  
COMPOSITE  
ref  
auto  
Item 308 setting  
STD  
N-STD  
STD  
N-STD  
Operation mode  
External synchronization status  
a)  
a)  
a)  
a)  
When a signal is input  
to the REF VIDEO IN  
connector  
E-E mode  
REF  
REF  
REF  
REF  
Normal playback  
REC button pressed  
Recording  
b)  
INPUT/Free  
b)  
d)  
d)  
When no signal is  
input to the REF  
VIDEO IN connector  
E-E mode  
INPUT/Free  
Free RUN  
Free RUN  
Normal playback  
REC button pressed  
Recording  
VIDEO INPUT SEL button setting  
Item 335 setting  
SDI  
i.LINK  
SG  
ref  
auto  
ref/auto  
STD/N-STD  
ref/auto  
Item 308 setting  
STD/N-STD  
STD/N-STD  
STD/N-STD  
Operation mode  
External synchronization status  
a)  
a)  
a)  
a)  
When a signal is input  
to the REF VIDEO IN  
connector  
E-E mode  
REF  
REF  
REF  
REF  
Normal playback  
REC button pressed  
Recording  
c)  
SDI IN/Free  
c)  
d)  
d)  
When no signal is  
input to the REF  
VIDEO IN connector  
E-E mode  
SDI IN/Free  
Free RUN  
Free RUN  
Normal playback  
REC button pressed  
Recording  
a) Synchronize to the reference signal input to the REF VIDEO IN connector.  
b) Synchronize to the signal input to the VIDEO IN connector. If no signal is  
input to the connector, no synchronization is made.  
c) Synchronize to the signal input to the SDI IN connector. If no signal is  
input to the connector, no synchronization is made.  
d) No external synchronization is made.  
Menu items in the 400s, relating to preroll  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
401  
FUNCTION MODE AFTER CUE-UP Select the state that the unit goes into after a cuing-up operation.  
stop: Stops (the stop mode).  
still: Still playback (in jog and shuttle mode).  
100  
7-3 Extended Menu  
   
Menu items in the 500s, relating to disc protection  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
501 STILL TIMER  
To protect the disc against shock and vibrations, and to lengthen the life  
of the laser diodes, the unit automatically enters standby off mode  
whenever a specified time elapses in a disc stop mode (stop mode or the  
still picture mode of search mode). This allows you to set the time after  
which the unit exits a disc stop mode and enters standby off mode.  
0.5 s (0.5 sec)... 8 m (8 min)... 30 m (30 min): Can be set in the range  
from 0.5 seconds to 30 minutes.  
off: Do not put into standby off mode.  
Menu items in the 600s, relating to the time code, metadata, and UMID  
Item number Item name  
601 VITC POSITION SEL-1  
Settings  
a)  
Select a line into which to insert VITC signals for IMX recording signals  
and DVCAM playback signals.  
b)  
12 H (12 line)... 16 H (16 line)... 20 H (20 line) (in 525(U)/525(J) line  
modes)  
9 H (9 line)... 19 H (19 line)... 22 H (22 line) (in 625 line mode)  
Note  
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two places,  
set both items 601 and 602.  
a) In the IMX format, VITC is inserted as video signals in vertical blanking sections.  
Because these signals are output as video signals during playback, the insertion  
line can be specified only for recording.  
b) In the DVCAM format, VITC is recorded as VAUX (Video Auxiliary) data.  
Because VITC is inserted into video signals by the VITC generator only during  
playback, the insertion line can be specified only for playback.  
a)  
602  
VITC POSITION SEL-2  
Select a line into which to insert VITC signals for IMX recording signals  
and DVCAM playback signals.  
b)  
12 H (12 line)... 18 H (18 line)... 20 H (20 line) (in 525(U)/525(J) line  
modes)  
9 H (9 line)... 21 H (21 line)... 22 H (22 line) (in 625 line mode)  
Note  
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two places,  
set both items 601 and 602.  
a) In the IMX format, VITC is inserted as video signals in vertical blanking sections.  
Because these signals are output as video signals during playback, the insertion  
line can be specified only for recording.  
b) In the DVCAM format, VITC is recorded as VAUX (Video Auxiliary) data.  
Because VITC is inserted into video signals by the VITC generator only during  
playback, the insertion line can be specified only for playback.  
605  
607  
TCG REGEN MODE  
Select the signal to be regenerated when the time code generator is in  
the regeneration mode (i.e., when the PRESET/REGEN switch is set to  
REGEN).  
TC&UB: Both the time code and user bits are regenerated.  
TC: Only the time code is regenerated.  
UB: Only the user bits are regenerated.  
U-BIT BINARY GROUP FLAG  
Select the user bits to be used in the time code generated by the time  
code generator.  
000 (000:not specified): Character set not specified.  
001 (001:iso character): 8-bit characters compliant with ISO 646 and  
ISO 2022.  
010 (010:unassigned-1): Undefined.  
011 (011:unassigned-2): Undefined.  
100 (100:unassigned-3): Undefined.  
101 (101:page / line): SMPTE 262M page/line multiplex system.  
110 (110:unassigned-4): Undefined.  
111 (111:unassigned-5): Undefined.  
7-3 Extended Menu  
101  
     
Menu items in the 600s, relating to the time code, metadata, and UMID  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
611  
TC OUTPUT PHASE IN EE MODE Select the time code output mode for output from the TC OUT connector  
in E-E mode.  
mutng (muting): Suppress the output.  
thru (through): Output the time code input to the TC IN connector as it  
is.  
v-in (video input phase): Output the time code with the same phase as  
the input video signal phase.  
v-out (video output phase): Output the time code with the same phase  
as the output video signal phase.  
612  
619  
TC OUTPUT MUTING IN SEARCH Select whether to suppress the output from the TC OUT connector in jog/  
MODE  
shuttle mode.  
on: Suppress.  
off: Do not suppress.  
VITC  
Specify whether or not to record the VITC generated by the internal time  
code generator.  
off: Do not record internally generated VITC.  
on: Record internally generated VITC.  
Note  
Even if this item is set to “off,VITC is recorded if the input video signal  
contains VITC and the VITC line is set to “thru” with item 723.  
628  
629  
DF MODE  
In 525(U)/525(J) line modes, when the INT/EXT/RP188 switch is set to  
INT and the PRESET/REGEN switch is set to PRESET, select the frame  
mode of the internal time code generator and counter.  
df (on (df)): Drop-frame mode  
ndf (off (ndf)): Non-drop frame mode  
TC SELECT  
Select the type of time data to show in the time data display, and the type  
of external time code when the INT/EXT/RP188 switch is set to EXT and  
the PRESET/REGEN switch is set to REGEN.  
vitc: Display time code as VITC, or select VITC as the external time  
code.  
tc: Display time code as TC, or select TC as the external time code.  
more information about selecting external time code.  
632  
633  
634  
651  
TC UBIT SELECT  
When item 629 is set to “tc,specify whether to synchronize the user bits  
of the time code generator to the internal clock.  
fix: Do not synchronize user bits.  
time: Synchronize user bits to the internal clock.  
VITC UBIT SELECT  
WATCH AUTO ADJUST  
UMID SDI OUTPUT  
When item 629 is set to “vitc,” specify whether to synchronize the user  
bits of the time code generator to the internal clock.  
fix: Do not synchronize user bits.  
time: Synchronize user bits to the internal clock.  
When external time code input contains real-time clock user bits, specify  
whether to adjust the internal clock to match the real-time clock.  
off: Do not adjust the internal clock to match the real-time clock.  
on: Adjust the internal clock to match the real-time clock.  
Select whether to output UMID in the VANC of the SDI output.  
off: Do not output.  
on: Output.  
See 7-3-3 “Using UMID Data” (page 109) for more information about  
UMID.  
102  
7-3 Extended Menu  
Menu items in the 600s, relating to the time code, metadata, and UMID  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
652  
UMID SDI VANC LINE  
Select the line in which UMID is output when menu item 651 is set to  
“on.”  
12 H (12 line), 13 H (13 line), 15 H (15 line), 16 H (16 line), 17 H (17  
line), 18 H (18 line), 19 H (19 line) (525(U)/525(J) line modes)  
9 H (9 line), 10 H (10 line), 12 H (12 line), 13 H (13 line), 14 H (14 line),  
15 H (15 line), 16 H (16 line), 17 H (17 line), 18 H (18 line) (625  
line mode)  
See 7-3-3 “Using UMID Data” (page 109) for more information about  
UMID.  
657  
660  
ESSENCE MARK SDI OUTPUT  
ESSENCE MARK SDI VANC LINE  
Select whether to output essence marks in the SDI output VANC.  
off: Do not output.  
on: Output.  
When item 657 is set to “on,” select the line to which to output essence  
marks.  
12 H (12 line), 13 H (13 line), 15 H (15 line), 16 H (16 line), 17 H (17  
line), 18 H (18 line), 19 H (19 line) (525(U)/525(J) line modes)  
9 H (9 line), 10 H (10 line), 12 H (12 line), 13 H (13 line), 14 H (14 line),  
15 H (15 line), 16 H (16 line), 17 H (17 line), 18 H (18 line) (625  
line mode)  
Menu items in the 700s, relating to video control  
Item  
number  
Item name  
Settings  
701  
SELECTION OF VIDEO/SYNC  
DELAY  
An E-E video signal is output delayed with respect to the video input signal by  
the time for video circuit processing.  
With this item, select whether or not to delay the sync signal attached to the  
output video signal by an amount corresponding to the video signal delay.  
sync (sync delay): Delay the sync signal by the corresponding amount  
before attaching it.  
video (video delay): Attach a sync signal with the same timing as the input  
signal.  
7-3 Extended Menu  
103  
 
Menu items in the 700s, relating to video control  
Settings  
Item  
number  
Item name  
703  
BLANK LINE SELECT  
Sub-item  
Switch blanking of the video output signal on or off for individual lines in the  
vertical blanking interval.  
The Y/C signal and odd/even fields are blanked simultaneously.  
1
ALL LINE  
- - -: Specify the blanking for each line separately.  
blnk (blank): Regardless of the setting of other sub-items, blank all lines  
which can be specified in this menu item.  
thru (throu): Regardless of the setting of other sub-items, switch off blanking  
for all lines which can be specified in this menu item.  
2 ... LINE 12 ...  
In 525(U) line Specify blanking for lines 12 to 19.  
9
LINE 19  
mode  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
10  
LINE 20  
Specify blanking for line 20.  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
half: Carry out half-blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
2 ... LINE 12 ...  
In 525(J) line Specify blanking for lines 12 to 20.  
10  
LINE 20  
mode  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
11  
LINE 21  
Specify blanking for line 21.  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
half: Carry out half-blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
2 ... LINE 9, 322  
In 625 line  
mode  
Specify blanking for lines 9, 322 to 22, 335.  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
15  
... LINE 22,  
335  
16  
LINE 23  
Specify blanking for line 23.  
half: Carry out half-blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
705  
707  
EDGE SUBCARRIER REDUCER  
MODE  
Select whether to enable the edge subcarrier reducer (ESR).  
on: Enable.  
off: Do not enable.  
When playing back a composite signal, set this to “on.”  
FORCED VERTICAL  
INTERPOLATION OFF  
The “Y-add” function is normally switched on automatically during jog or  
variable speed playback. This item selects whether or not to force the “Y-add”  
function off.  
auto: Automatically switch the “Y-add” function on.  
off (forced YADD off): Force the “Y-add” function off.  
The “Y-add” function is off while a disc image is displayed in stop mode (menu  
item 108 “AUTO EE SELECT” is “off”).  
The “Y-add” function is a circuit operation to interpolate the video signal  
vertically during jog or variable speed playback for the purpose of reducing  
the vertical movement of the playback picture.  
710  
INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL  
GENERATOR  
Select the test signal to be output from the internal test signal generator.  
When “SG” is selected using the VIDEO INPUT SEL button, the internal test  
signal generator operates to output the selected test signal. This signal can  
also be recorded.  
BB (Black Burst): Black burst signal  
CB75 (75% Color Bars): 75% color bar signal  
CB100 (100% Color Bars): 100% color bar signal  
The factory default settings for each line mode are as follows:  
In 525(U)/525(J) line modes: CB75 (75% Color Bars)  
In 625 line mode: CB100 (100% Color Bars)  
104  
7-3 Extended Menu  
Menu items in the 700s, relating to video control  
Settings  
Item  
number  
Item name  
713  
VIDEO SETUP REFERENCE  
Sub-item  
Select whether to remove the setup (7.5%) from the input analog video  
signals and whether to add the setup (7.5%) to the output analog video  
signals (when 525(U) or 525(J) line mode is selected).  
1
2
INPUT LEVEL  
Whether to remove the setup (7.5%) from the input analog video signals.  
0.0%: Do not remove.  
7.5%: Remove.  
The factory default settings for each line mode are as follows:  
525(U) line mode: 7.5%  
525(J) line mode: 0.0%  
OUTPUT LEVEL  
Whether to add the setup (7.5%) to the output analog video signals.  
0.0%: Do not add.  
7.5%: Add.  
The factory default settings for each line mode are as follows:  
525(U) line mode: 7.5%  
525(J) line mode: 0.0%  
723  
INPUT VIDEO BLANK  
Sub-item  
Switch blanking on or off for individual lines in the vertical blanking interval of  
an input video signal. The Y/C signal and odd/even fields are blanked  
simultaneously.  
A signal with blanking carried out according to this setting is recorded.  
1
ALL LINE  
- - -: Specify the blanking for each line separately.  
blnk (blank): Regardless of the setting of other sub-items, blank all lines  
which can be specified in this menu item.  
thru (throu): Regardless of the setting of other sub-items, switch off blanking  
for all lines which can be specified in this menu item.  
2 ... LINE 12 ...  
10 LINE 20  
In 525(U)/  
525(J) line  
modes  
Specify blanking for lines 12 to 20.  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
2 ... LINE 9, 322  
In 625 line  
mode  
Specify blanking for lines 9, 322 to 22, 335.  
blnk (blank): Carry out blanking.  
thru (throu): Switch off blanking.  
15  
...  
LINE 22, 335  
726  
728  
H BLANKING WIDTH  
Select the horizontal blanking width of the output analog video signal.  
narow (narrow): Digital blanking (narrow)  
wide: Analog blanking (wide)  
When “wide” is selected, the horizontal blanking width complies with RS170A,  
and normally the blanking is widened and the image becomes narrower. It is  
recommended to select “narow” at the editing stage, then later, for broadcast  
transmission to select “wide,to output a signal conforming to the standard.  
Note, however, that “narow” has to be always selected for SDI signals.  
OUTPUT SCH PHASE  
Set the subcarrier H phase.  
–512 (–512 (DEC))... 0 (0 (DEC))... 511 (511 (DEC))  
7-3 Extended Menu  
105  
Menu items in the 700s, relating to video control  
Settings  
Item  
number  
Item name  
731  
WIDE MODE  
Sub-item  
Specify whether to record and play back with the addition of wide picture  
information.  
1
2
INPUT  
Specify whether to save wide picture information on a disc during recording.  
auto: Automatically record wide picture information when it is detected in the  
selected input video signal.  
on: Always record wide picture information.  
off: Do not record wide picture information.  
OUTPUT  
Specify whether to add wide picture information to the output signal during  
MPEG IMX playback.  
thru (through): Output the video signals of the disc being played back  
without adding wide picture information.  
auto: When wide picture information is detected on the disc being played  
back, add wide picture information to the output video signals.  
Notes  
To add wide picture information to the output signal, it is necessary, in  
addition to setting this item to “thru,to operate extended menu item 703 to  
set line 20 (in 525 line mode) to “thru” or set line 23 (in 625 line mode) to  
“thru.”  
• In 525 line mode, wide picture information may not be output if VITC signal  
insertion position is set to line 20 in extended menu item 601 or 602.  
Menu items in the 800s, relating to audio control  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
802  
DIGITAL AUDIO MUTING IN  
SHUTTLE MODE  
Set the audio muting conditions during shuttle playback.  
off: Not muted.  
on: Muted.  
807  
808  
AUDIO OUTPUT PHASE  
Set the output timing of digital audio playback signals (SDI, AES/EBU  
only), with 80H as a reference position. Output timing is earlier for  
values smaller than 80H and later for values greater than 80H. (80H,  
128 samples = approx. 2.7 ms, 80H, 1 sample = approx. 20 μs)  
0 (0 (HEX))... 80 (80 (HEX))... FF (FF (HEX)): Values can be set in this  
range.  
INTERNAL AUDIO SIGNAL  
GENERATOR  
Select the operation of the internal audio test signal generator.  
silnc (silence): Silent signal.  
1kHz (1kHz sine): 1 kHz, –20 dB FS sine wave signal.  
When you select SG as the audio input in the input selection section of  
the control panel, the audio test signal generated by the internal audio  
test signal generator is input.  
815  
820  
AUDIO SAMPLING RATE  
CONVERTER  
Select the mode of operation of the sampling rate converter for AES/  
EBU input to channels 1 to 4.  
off: Do not operate.  
on: Operate.  
AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/CH2 SELECT Select the signals to be output from the AUDIO OUT 1/3 and AUDIO  
OUT 2/4 connectors.  
line (line out): Output the audio channel signals selected with item 824  
“just as they are” from the AUDIO OUT 1/3 and 2/4 connectors.  
moni (monitor out): Output the monitor audio L-channel (CH-1) and  
monitor audio R-channel (CH-2) signals from the AUDIO OUT 1/3 and  
AUDIO OUT 2/4 connectors, respectively.  
106  
7-3 Extended Menu  
 
Menu items in the 800s, relating to audio control  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
823 NON-AUDIO FLAG PB  
Sub-item  
Control non-audio flags in digital audio output.  
1
2
3
4
CH1/CH2  
During playback (except E-E mode), set non-audio flags in digital audio  
output to the following states.  
on: Set to on (data is non-audio)  
auto: Set as follows.  
CH3/CH4  
CH5/CH6  
CH7/CH8  
• When data is read from disc and confirmed: Follow the data.  
• When data from disc is not confirmed: Maintain current state.  
824  
ANALOG LINE OUTPUT SELECT  
Select the analog audio signals (tracks 1 to 8) to be assigned to audio  
output channels 1 and 2.  
tr1/2: Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr3/4: Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr5/6: Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr7/8: Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
Note  
When item 820 is set to “moni,the left channel (CH-1) and right  
channel (CH-2) of monitor audio are output from the AUDIO OUT 1/3  
and 2/4 connectors respectively, regardless of the setting of this item.  
827  
AES/EBU AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT Select the audio signals to assign to AES/EBU audio output channels.  
Sub-item  
1
CH1/CH2  
tr1/2: Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr3/4: Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr5/6: Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr7/8: Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
2
CH3/CH4  
tr1/2: Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr3/4: Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr5/6: Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr7/8: Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
828  
SDI/DV AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT  
Select the audio signals to assign to SDI and i.LINK(AV/C) audio output  
channels.  
s
Sub-item  
1
CH1/CH2  
tr1/2: Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr3/4: Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr5/6: Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr7/8: Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
2
CH3/CH4  
tr1/2: Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr3/4: Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr5/6: Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr7/8: Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
831  
837  
DV OUT AUDIO MODE  
Select the audio mode for S400 (i.LINK) connector (output).  
4ch: 12 bit/32 kHz/4ch  
2ch: 16 bit/48 kHz/2ch  
AUDIO MONITOR CHANNEL  
ARRANGE  
Together with item 838, select the audio signals (tracks 1 to 4) to assign  
to the left and right channels of the audio monitor.  
Sub-item  
L-1 Lch/tr1  
L-2 Lch/tr2  
L-3 Lch/tr3  
L-4 Lch/tr4  
R-1 Rch/tr1  
R-2 Rch/tr2  
R-3 Rch/tr3  
R-4 Rch/tr4  
No display: Do not assign.  
on: Assign.  
The factory default settings are as follows.  
Lch: tr1  
Rch: tr2  
7-3 Extended Menu  
107  
Menu items in the 800s, relating to audio control  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
838  
AUDIO MONITOR CHANNEL  
Together with item 837, select the audio signals (tracks 5 to 8) to assign  
ARRANGE  
to the left and right channels of the audio monitor.  
Sub-item  
L-5 Lch/tr5  
L-6 Lch/tr6  
L-7 Lch/tr7  
L-8 Lch/tr8  
R-5 Rch/tr5  
R-6 Rch/tr6  
R-7 Rch/tr7  
R-8 Rch/tr8  
No display: Do not assign.  
on: Assign.  
The factory default settings are as follows.  
Lch: No display  
Rch: No display  
Menu items in the 900s, relating to digital process  
Item number Item name  
920 SD-SDI H-ANC CONTROL  
Sub-item  
Settings  
Select whether or not to add information to the SDI output.  
1
AUDIO 5CH-8CH  
off: Do not add digital audio data channels 5 to 8.  
on: Add digital audio data channels 5 to 8.  
2
RP188 ATC  
off: Do not add RP188 time code data.  
on: Add RP188 time code data.  
7-3-2 Extended Menu Operations  
The extended menu can be used with the same procedures  
as in the basic menu.  
However, since with the factory default settings the  
extended menu is not displayed, it is first necessary to  
enable display of the extended menu.  
information about how to select menu items and how to  
change their values.  
2
Use a ballpoint pen or other sharp implement to set the  
leftmost of the DIP switches on the right side to the  
ON (top) position.  
Enabling display of the extended menu  
Note  
Do not use a pencil for this operation, as graphite  
deposits can cause short circuits and lead to failure.  
To enable display of the extended menu, an internal switch  
must be set to on, and extended menu display must be  
enabled in the maintenance menu. (The internal switch is  
set to on when the unit is shipped from the factory. Unless  
you have set it to off, there is no need to change the switch  
setting.)  
To set the internal switch to on  
1
Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the cover on the  
rear panel of this unit  
108  
7-3 Extended Menu  
         
MAINTENANCE MENU  
DRIVE MAINTENANCE  
ADJUST  
CHECK  
BATTERY CONFIG  
AUDIO CONFIG  
NETWORK CONFIG  
SETUP MAINTENANCE  
SERVICE SUPPORT  
OTHERS  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
t
1 2 3 4  
1 2 3 4  
4
5
Press the g button.  
Set this switch to “ON.”  
Use the F/f buttons to select “EXTENDED MENU.”  
MAINTENANCE MENU  
SETUP MAINTENANCE  
3
Replace the cover.  
T
t
EXTENDED MENU : dis  
SETUP BANK4  
Note  
SAVE MENU DATA  
Tighten the screws firmly.  
LOAD MENU DATA  
AU BANK RECALL: off  
RESET ALL SETUP  
To enable extended menu display in the  
maintenance menu  
The menu screens in the following procedure are those that  
appear in the video panel, and on a monitor to which the  
output of the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT  
(SUPER) connector is input.  
6
7
Press the g button.  
Proceed as follows.  
Press the f button to select “ENABLE.”  
MAINTENANCE MENU  
SETUP MAINTENANCE  
EXTENDED MENU : dis  
* DISABLE  
1
2 8  
T
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
ENABLE  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
PRESET  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
8
Press the SET button.  
3,5,7 4,6  
When you next display the menu and change the item  
display, the extended menu will appear after the basic  
menu.  
1
2
3
Press the MENU button.  
The setup menu appears in the video panel and on the  
external monitor.  
7-3-3 Using UMID Data  
To perform operations from interviewing to editing  
effectively and to detect audio-visual materials easily  
when reusing them, metadata that provides additional  
information is recorded along with audio-visual data. As  
one of application of metadata, the UMID (Unique  
Material Identifier) is internationally standardized.  
Hold down the COUNTER SEL button, and press the  
SET button.  
The screen switches to the maintenance menu.  
Use the F/f buttons to select “SETUP  
MAINTENANCE.”  
7-3 Extended Menu  
109  
   
What is a UMID?  
The UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a unique  
identifier for audio-visual material defined by the  
SMPTE330M-2003 standard.  
The UMID may be used either as the 32-byte Basic UMID  
or as the Extended UMID, which includes an additional 32  
bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes.  
For details, refer to SMPTE 330M.  
Extended UMID (64 bytes)  
Basic UMID (32 bytes)  
Source Pack (32 bytes)  
Spatial  
Universal label  
12 bytes  
L
1
Inst. No. Material Number  
Time/Date  
8 bytes  
Country Org  
User  
Co-ordinates  
3 bytes  
16 bytes  
12 bytes  
4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes  
Globally unique ID is automatically recorded in clip units.  
The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional  
information such as location, time/date, company and so  
on.  
The UMID is applied as follows.  
Material No.  
ID generated when  
recording  
Source Pack  
Shooting information (when,  
where and who)  
Instance No.  
Same as the above  
Same as the above  
Original material: 00 00 00  
Copied material: generation number  
(1 byte) + random number (2 bytes)  
M
M
M
Distinguishing between the  
original material and copied  
material  
Material source ID/detecting  
material  
Metadata pack that identifies  
the source of material unit by  
defining the when, where  
and who of the material unit  
with which it is associated.  
Using the Extended UMID  
• Recording based on the UTC. The UTC is used when  
recording the UMID. This enables uniform control of  
source material recorded all over the world based on the  
universal time code.  
• Calculating the date difference among source materials.  
The source material is recorded based on the MJD  
(Modified Julian Date), which enables easy calculation  
of date difference among source materials.  
You have to enter a country code, organization code and  
user code. Set the country code referring to the ISO-3166  
table, and set the organization code and user code  
independently.  
Functions of UMID data  
Setting UMID ownership information  
Proceed as follows.  
The UMID data enables the followings:  
• Add a globally unique ID to every clip of audio-visual  
material. The unique ID is used to detect the material  
source and to link it with the original source material.  
• Distinguishing between original material and copied  
material. 00 is added to the Instance Number for original  
material.  
1
Set extended menu item 029 “STORED  
OWNERSHIP” to “on.”  
more information about how to make this setting.  
110  
7-3 Extended Menu  
2
Set the following item.  
• There are no problems in recording or playing back  
audio-video signals, if ORGANIZATION is not set.  
Item  
Contents  
USER (user code)  
Enter the 4-byte alphanumeric strings for user  
identification.  
The user code is registered with each organization locally.  
It is usually not centrally registered.  
COUNTRY  
ORGANIZATION  
USER  
Country code  
Organization code  
User code  
When the country code is less than 4 bytes, enter the  
country code from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter  
the space character (20h) in the remaining strings.  
This user code is determined by the organization. The  
methods used depend on the organization.  
To change the currently selected item  
Hold down the STOP button, and turn the jog dial or  
shuttle dial.  
To select a different digit to be changed  
Turn the jog dial or shuttle dial.  
Note  
User code cannot be entered when no organization code  
has been entered.  
To change the value of a digit  
Hold down the SHUTTLE button, and turn the jog dial  
or shuttle dial.  
3
Press the SET button.  
About UMID ownership information  
COUNTRY (country code)  
Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string (4-byte  
alphanumeric strings) according to the values defined in  
ISO 3166-1.  
There are about 240 country codes.  
Find your own country code on the following home page.  
Refer to ISO-3166-1:  
http://www.evertype.com/standards/iso3166/iso3166-1-  
en.html  
When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the active part  
of the code will occupy the first part of the 4-bytes and the  
remainder must be filled with the space character (20h).  
Example: In the case of Japan  
For Japan, if the country code is JP, it is 2 bytes, if JPN, it  
is 3 bytes.  
Thus, enter the following:  
JP_ _  
or  
JPN _  
where _ represents a space.  
ORGANIZATION (organization code)  
Enter an abbreviated 4-byte alphanumeric string for the  
organization code.  
Notes  
• Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the  
SMPTE registration office.  
When no organization code has been acquired, it is  
forbidden to enter an arbitrary string. As a rule, the code  
“00” must be entered. Freelance operators who do not  
~
belong to an origination should enter “ .”  
7-3 Extended Menu  
111  
 
7-4 Maintenance Menu  
7-4-1 Items in the Maintenance Menu  
The following tables show the items in the maintenance  
menu.  
• Item names are the names which appear in the video  
panel, and on an external monitor to which the output of  
the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER)  
connector is input.  
appear in a different format in the video panel and on an  
external monitor. In this case, the video panel values are  
shown in parentheses.) Underlined values are the factory  
defaults.  
For information about the DRIVE MAINTENANCE,  
ADJUST, CHECK, BATTERY CONFIG and SERVICE  
SUPPORT items, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
• The values in the Settings columns are the values which  
appear in the time data display section. (The values may  
AUDIO CONFIG: items relating to audio control  
Setting  
Item  
METR HEAD ROOM  
Select the audio reference level (headroom).  
–12dB,–16dB, –18dB, –20dB (525(U)/525(J) line modes)  
–12dB, –16dB, –18dB, –20dB, EBUL (625 line mode)  
DATA LENGTH  
When “IMX50, IMX40,or “IMX30” is selected in setup menu item 031, this selects the  
audio quantization bit count and number of recording channels.  
×
×
16 8 (16bit 8ch): 16 bits × 8 channels  
24×4 (24bit × 4ch): 24 bits × 4 channels  
Note  
When item 031 is set to “DVCAM,” the setting is automatically fixed at 16 bits × 4 channels.  
NON-AUDIO INPUT  
Sub-item  
Select whether to handle digital audio signals as non-audio signals during recording.  
Audio (audio): Handle as audio signals.  
data: Handle as non-audio signals.  
tr1/tr2  
tr3/tr4  
tr5/tr6  
tr7/tr8  
INPUT LEVEL  
Sub-item  
Set the upper limit for the signal level input to audio channels 1/3 or 2/4.  
+4dB, 0dB, –3dB, –6dB (525(U)/525(J) line modes)  
+4dB, 0dB, –3dB, –6dB, EBUL (625 line mode)  
CH1/CH3  
CH2/CH4  
OUTPUT LEVEL  
Set the reference level for audio output signals.  
+4dB, 0dB, –3dB, –6dB (525(U)/525(J) line modes)  
+4dB, 0dB, –3dB, –6dB, EBUL (625 line mode)  
NETWORK CONFIG: items relating to network settings  
Setting  
Item  
DHCP  
Set whether to assign an IP address automatically with the DHCP server.  
DISABLE: Do not assign automatically.  
ENABLE: Assign automatically.  
IP ADDRESS PRESET  
Set IP address.  
192.168.001.010  
Note  
When DHCP is set to “ENABLE,it is not possible to set the IP address.  
112  
7-4 Maintenance Menu  
           
NETWORK CONFIG: items relating to network settings  
Setting  
Item  
SUBNET MASK PRESET  
Set the subnet mask.  
255.255.255.000  
Note  
When DHCP is set to “ENABLE,it is not possible to set the subnet mask.  
DEFAULT GATEWAY PRESET Set the default gateway.  
000.000.000.000  
Note  
When DHCP is set to “ENABLE,it is not possible to set the default gateway.  
LINK SPEED  
DUPLEX  
Set the communications speed.  
AUTO, 10Mbps, 100Mbps  
Set the communications method.  
AUTO, Full (Full Duplex), Half (Half Duplex)  
For details of how to make settings, see “To change  
SETUP MAINTENANCE: items relating to the setup menu  
Setting  
Item  
EXTENDED MENU  
Select whether or not to display the extended menu.  
DISABLE: Do not display.  
ENABLE: Display.  
SETUP BANK4  
Select the bank to be stored in menu bank 4, or reset menu bank 4.  
Cur to 4 (CURRENT TO BANK4): Store the current menu settings in menu bank 4.  
1 to 4 (BANK1 TO BANK4): Store the menu bank 1 settings in menu bank 4.  
2 to 4 (BANK2 TO BANK4): Store the menu bank 2 settings in menu bank 4.  
3 to 4 (BANK3 TO BANK4): Store the menu bank 3 settings in menu bank 4.  
Reset (RESET BANK4): Reset menu bank 4.  
SAVE MENU DATA  
LOAD MENU DATA  
AU BANK RECALL  
Select whether to temporarily back up (save) setup menu settings before operations such as  
software upgrades.  
SET button: Back up (save) the settings.  
MENU button: Return to next highest menu level without backing up.  
Select whether to restore (load) setting that were backed up (saved) with the “SAVE MENU  
DATA” item.  
SET button: Restore (load) the settings.  
MENU button: Return to the next highest menu level without restoring.  
Select whether to recall settings automatically from a menu bank when the system is  
powered on, and if so which menu bank to recall from.  
off: Do not recall settings from a menu bank.  
Bank1 (from BANK1): Recall settings from menu bank 1.  
Bank2 (from BANK2): Recall settings from menu bank 2.  
Bank3 (from BANK3): Recall settings from menu bank 3.  
Bank4 (from BANK4): Recall settings from menu bank 4.  
RESET ALL SETUP  
Reset the current menu settings to the factory settings.  
SET button: Reset.  
MENU button: Return to the next highest menu level without resetting.  
Notes  
• The line mode setting is also cleared. If you execute this item, reset the line mode (see  
• Date and time settings are not cleared, but the time zone setting is cleared. After executing  
this item, reset the time zone (see page 34).  
7-4 Maintenance Menu  
113  
   
OTHERS  
Item  
Setting  
SDI SUPER  
Select whether to output superimpose characters to the SDI OUT (SUPER) connector.  
ON: Output.  
OFF: Do not output.  
For details about OTHERS items other than the above,  
refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
highlighted, and the arrow (c) flashes to indicate that  
you can move to a lower-level menu.  
7-4-2 Maintenance Menu Operations  
Group selection screen  
Basic maintenance menu operations  
The following explains how to select maintenance menu  
items and how to change their values. The menu screen  
shown are those that appear in the video panel and on a  
monitor to which the output of the VIDEO OUT 2  
(SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER) connector is input.  
First change the switch setting within the unit, then carry  
out the following operations.  
MAINTENANCE MENU  
DRIVE MAINTENANCE  
ADJUST  
CHECK  
BATTERY CONFIG  
AUDIO CONFIG  
t
NETWORK CONFIG  
SETUP MAINTENANCE  
SERVICE SUPPORT  
OTHERS  
For information about how to change the switch setting  
within the unit, see page 108.  
Flashing  
Video panel  
To select the item group  
Use the F/f buttons.  
3
Press the g button.  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
dB OVER  
0
VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  
PB NDF EXT-LK  
VITC  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-12  
-20  
-20  
-20  
-20  
A lower-level menu (item selection screen) appears.  
The currently selected item is highlighted, and the  
arrow (C/c) flashes to indication that you can move to  
a higher- or lower-level menu.  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
SECONDS  
FRAMES  
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
DISC  
BATT  
E
E
B
CH  
-
15 CH- 26  
CH- 37  
CH- 48  
F
PROCESS  
CONTROL  
STATUS CHARACTER  
AUDIO  
INPUT CH INPUT SEL INPUT SEL  
VIDEO  
LIGHT  
MONITOR  
WARNING  
KEY INHI  
REC INHI  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF  
L
H
1
2 6  
SHUTTLE  
Item selection screen  
JOG  
SUB  
THUMB  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
F-RUN  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
CLIP  
NAIL  
Flashing  
HOLD  
INT  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
R-RUN  
CH-4  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
MAINTENANCE MENU  
NETWORK CONFIG  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
T
t
DHCP  
: dis  
MARK2  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
DEFAULT GATEWAY  
LINK SPEED : auto  
DUPLEX : auto  
2,3,5 3,4  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The menu appears in the video panel and on the  
external monitor.  
To return to the item group  
Press the G button.  
Hold down the COUNTER SEL button, and press the  
SET button.  
To select the menu item  
Use the F/f buttons.  
The group selection screen of the maintenance menu  
appears. The currently selected item group is  
114  
7-4 Maintenance Menu  
       
4
Press the g button.  
For details of the settings, consult your network  
administrator.  
A lower-level menu (setting modification screen)  
appears. The current setting is highlighted, and the  
arrow (C) flashes to indicate that you can move to a  
higher-level menu. If the current setting is the factory  
default, a colon (:) appears between the item name and  
the setting. A midpoint (•) appears if you change the  
factory default setting to another value and then  
display the setting modification screen again.  
When the IP address is assigned automatically  
Check that the network cable is connected to this unit  
before carrying out the operation.  
4
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
Setting modification screen  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
Flashes  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MAINTENANCE MENU  
NETWORK CONFIG  
MARK2  
DHCP  
: dis  
T
* DISABLE  
ENABLE  
1,3  
2
1
2
3
4
Using the F/f buttons to select “DHCP.”  
Press the g button.  
Current setting  
Press the f button to select “ENABLE.”  
Press the SET button.  
Indicates that the current setting is  
the factory default (change to “•” if  
the default setting is changed)  
Indicates a factory default setting  
To check the assigned IP address  
In the NETWORK CONFIG menu, using the F/f  
buttons to select “IP ADDRESS,” then press the g  
button.  
To return to the menu item  
Press the G button.  
Note  
When there is a sub-item  
If the IP address cannot be assigned, this is shown as  
“000.000.000.000.” In this case, consult the network  
administrator.  
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the setting modification  
screen appears.  
To set the IP address  
First set DHCP to “DISABLE.” (See the previous item,  
“When the IP address is assigned automatically.”)  
5
6
Using the F/f buttons to select the desired setting.  
Press the SET button.  
This saves the new setting, and the menu disappears  
from the video panel or an external monitor.  
7
4,6 3  
To cancel changing a setting  
Before pressing the SET button, press the MENU  
button.  
The menu disappears from the video panel or an  
external monitor, without saving the new setting.  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
To change network settings  
To change network settings, carry out steps 1 to 3 in the  
procedure of “Basic maintenance menu operations” above,  
to display the NETWORK CONFIG menu item, then carry  
out the following operations.  
1,3 2,3  
7-4 Maintenance Menu  
115  
     
1
2
Using the F/f buttons to select “IP ADDRESS.”  
Setting the communications speed  
Set the communications speed (LINK SPEED) and  
communications method (DUPLEX) to match the network  
environment.  
Press the g button.  
The IP ADDRESS PRESET menu appears, and the  
digit that can be changed flashes.  
For details of the operation, see “Basic maintenance menu  
Item selection screen  
Flashing  
IP ADDRESS PRESET  
IP : 192.168.001.010  
DHCP: disable  
SHIFT : (C)(c)KEY  
INC/DEC : JOG DIAL  
CLEAR : RESET KEY  
DATA SET :  
SET KEY  
TO MENU : MENU KEY  
3
4
Set the IP address.  
To select a different digit to be changed  
Use the G/g buttons.  
To change the value of a digit  
Turn the jog dial or shuttle dial.  
Turning clockwise increases the value, and turning  
counterclockwise decreases the value.  
The F/f buttons can be used.  
To return to the factory default setting  
Press the RESET button.  
When all digits are set, press the SET button.  
This returns to the NETWORK CONFIG menu.  
To cancel a setting  
Before pressing the SET button, press the MENU  
button.  
This returns to the NETWORK CONFIG menu,  
without saving the new setting.  
5
6
7
Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required, to set the subnet mask  
and default gateway.  
In the NETWORK CONFIG menu, press the SET  
button.  
When the “NOW SAVING...” message vanishes,  
power the unit off and then on again with the on/  
standby switch.  
116  
7-4 Maintenance Menu  
7-5 System Menu  
7-5-1 Items in the System Menu  
The following tables show the items in the system menu.  
Item names are the names which appear in the video panel,  
and on an external monitor to which the output of the  
VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER) connector is  
input.  
DISC MENU: items relating to disc  
Item  
Setting  
STATUS  
Sub-item  
Display disc status or clip status.  
Note  
Although the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software can write TITLE1 and TITLE2, only TITLE1 is  
displayed here.  
1
2
DISC  
CLIP  
Display disc status.  
Display clip status.  
DELETE  
Sub-item  
Delete clips on the disc.  
1
2
LAST CLIP  
ALL CLIP  
Delete the last clip.  
Delete all the clips. (Locked files and files in the General directory cannot be deleted.)  
Select the disc format, and carry out formatting.  
FORMAT  
Sub-item  
1
QUICK FORMAT  
Quick format (Deletes all data on the disc, including the contents of the General directory.)  
DATE/TIME PRESET: items relating to date and time setting  
Item  
Setting  
YEAR  
Set the year, month, day, time, and time zone.  
MONTH  
DAY  
TIME  
TIME ZONE  
7-5-2 System Menu Operations  
MENU button  
SET button  
SHIFT button  
RESET button  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
EXT  
REMOTE  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
Arrow buttons  
7-5 System Menu  
117  
               
To return to the previous menu page  
Press the MENU button.  
To display disc status and clip status  
Insert a disc and proceed as follows.  
To exit the menu system  
Press the MENU button twice.  
1
Hold down the SHIFT button and press the MENU  
button.  
The system menu appears in the video panel or on an  
external monitor.  
To delete clips  
Notes  
2
3
4
Press the F button or f button to select “DISC  
• Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the  
disc is set to the recording disabled position, or when  
extended menu item 310 “REC INHIBIT” is set to “on.”  
• Locked clips (see page 55) are not deleted.  
MENU,” then press the g button.  
The DISC MENU page appears.  
Press the F button or f button to select “STATUS,”  
then press the g button.  
Proceed as follows.  
The “STATUS” menu item appears.  
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 2 in the previous section “To  
display disc status and clip status.”  
Display the disc status or the status of the current clip.  
Press the F button or f button to select “DELETE,”  
then press the g button.  
To display the disc status  
Press the F button or f button to select “DISC,” then  
press the g button.  
The “DELETE” menu item appears.  
Delete the last clip or all clips.  
The status of the loaded disc appears.  
3
DISC STATUS  
To delete the last clip  
Press the F button or f button to select “LAST CLIP,”  
then press the g button.  
USER ID:  
TITLE :  
(no ID)  
(no name)  
The name of the clip to be deleted appears.  
To cancel the deletion and return to the previous page,  
press the MENU button.  
REMAIN  
: 029 min  
REWRITE  
SALVAGE  
: 0002 times  
:
OK  
OK  
FILE SYSTEM :  
To delete all clips  
Press the F button or f button to select “ALL CLIP,”  
then press the g button.  
TO MENU : MENU KEY  
To display the status of the current clip  
Press the F button or f button to select “CLIP,” then  
press the g button.  
The message “ALL DELETE OK?” appears.  
To cancel the deletion and return to the previous page,  
press the RESET button.  
To cancel the deletion and exit the menu system, press  
the MENU button.  
The status of the clip at the current position appears.  
(When the current clip changes because of playback or  
a search, the display switches to the status of the new  
clip.)  
4
Press the SET button.  
The last clip is deleted, or all clips are deleted.  
CLIP STATUS  
You can use the THUMBNAIL MENU to delete the  
selected clip or all clips. For details, see page 56.  
CLIP NO  
NAME :  
:
001/010  
C0001  
TITLE:  
(no name)  
PDW-R1  
To format discs  
RECORD DEVICE:  
SERIAL:  
10001  
DATE : 01/01/06  
TIME : 19:54:38  
TO MENU : MENU KEY  
118  
7-5 System Menu  
       
To set the date and time  
7-5 System Menu  
119  
Maintenance and  
Troubleshooting  
8
Chapter  
H14: SPINDLE RUNNING mode (resettable)  
This shows the cumulative spindle rotation time, in units of  
hours. The count is resettable.  
This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  
the spindle motor.  
8-1Periodic Maintenance  
8-1-1 Digital Hours Meter  
H15: LOADING COUNTER mode (resettable)  
Display the total number of times disc has been loaded in  
the unit. The count is resettable.  
The digital hours meter can provide six items of  
information about the operational history of the unit. This  
information appears in the time data display section, in the  
video panel, and on an external monitor to which the  
output of the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT  
(SUPER) connector is input. Use the information as a  
guide in scheduling periodic maintenance.  
To display the digital hours meter  
Press the MENU button, then turn the jog dial or shuttle  
dial to display the required item in the time data display  
and in the video panel or on an external monitor.  
For periodic maintenance, consult your Sony dealer.  
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
SUB  
CLIP  
THUMB  
NAIL  
KEY INHI  
ON  
COUNTER  
SEL  
TC  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
INT  
F-RUN  
R-RUN  
NETWORK  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
EXT  
ACCESS  
RP188  
REGEN  
OFF  
CLIP  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
MENU  
ALL/CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-3  
CH-4  
METER MONITOR  
VARIABLE  
REC  
PRESET  
PB  
MENU  
SET  
RESET  
SEL  
SEL  
Display modes of the digital hours meter  
L/ST/R  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
S.SEL  
MARK1  
AUDIO  
PREV  
PLAY  
NEXT  
STOP  
REC  
H01: OPERATION mode  
Displays the total number of hours the unit has been  
powered on in units of 1 hour.  
IN  
OUT  
TOP  
F
REV  
F
FWD  
END  
MARK2  
Shuttle dial  
Jog dial  
MENU button  
H11: OPERATION mode (resettable)  
Same as H01 except that the count is resettable.  
This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  
parts.  
H12: LASER PARAMETER mode (resettable)  
To exit from the digital hours meter  
Press the MENU button.  
This shows a counter of the cumulative light output time  
1)  
by the optical head in units of hours. The count is  
resettable.  
To jump to H01  
This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  
the optical head.  
Press the MENU button, then the COUNTER SEL button.  
Every time you press the COUNTER SEL button, menu  
item H01 or B01 is recalled alternately.  
1) The counter advances at different rates during recording and playback. It  
is also affected by the ambient temperature.  
H13: SEEK RUNNING mode (resettable)  
This shows the cumulative seek operation time for the  
optical head in units of hours. The count is resettable.  
This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  
the seek motor.  
120  
8-1 Periodic Maintenance  
                   
8-2Condensation  
8-3Error Messages  
When this unit is moved from a cold place to a warmer  
place, or operated in high humidity, condensation may  
form on the optical pickup. This is called condensation,  
and if the unit is operated in this state, it may make correct  
recording and playback impossible.  
Error codes appear in the time data display when an error  
(usually a hardware problem) occurs. Error codes and error  
messages appear in the video panel, and on an external  
monitor to which the output of the VIDEO OUT 2  
(SUPER)/SDI OUT (SUPER) connector is input.  
When an error message appears, follow the instructions in  
the error message to resolve the problem.  
Note the following points, to avoid problems with  
condensation.  
• When moving the unit under conditions in which  
condensation is likely, first insert the disc, and close the  
lid on the disc slot.  
Display in video panel and on external monitor  
Error code  
• If when you move the on/standby switch to the ` position  
the indication “HUMID” appears in the status display,  
do not insert a disc until the indication disappears.  
ERROR  
AN ERROR HAS BEEN  
DETECTED. INFORM SERVICE  
OF FOLLOWING CODE:  
50-010  
PRESS EJECT KEY  
TO EJECT DISC.  
Display in time data display  
Error code  
8-2 Condensation / 8-3 Error Messages  
121  
           
8-4Alarms  
An alarm (warning message) appears in the time data  
display when an operation is attempted which is  
inappropriate for the settings on this unit or the state of the  
disc. The video panel and an external monitor to which the  
output of the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER)/SDI OUT  
(SUPER) connector is input displays the alarm message  
and also the action to take to resolve the problem.  
Display in video panel and on external monitor  
ALARM  
REMOTE MODE IS SELECTED.  
SET REMOTE/LOCAL/NETWORK  
SWITCH TO LOCAL.  
Display in time data display  
8-4-1 Alarm List  
The following tables list the alarms displayed by this unit,  
categorized according to the state of the unit when the  
alarms occur.  
The setting of basic menu item 016 “ALARM DISPLAY”  
determines whether or not some of these alarms appear.  
The “Display condition” column in the tables shows  
whether the alarm is displayed according to or regardless  
of the setting of menu item 016.  
information about how to set menu item 016.  
122  
8-4 Alarms  
           
When the unit is powered on  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
MENU Ver.UP  
on, limit, off  
Setup menu settings were reset,  
because this unit was upgraded.  
Reset the setup menu items.  
(page 108) for information about making  
setup menu settings.  
Maintenance menu item “SETUP  
MAINTENANCE” - “SAVE MENU DATA/  
LOAD MENU DATA” (see page 113) can be  
used to temporarily back up and restore the  
current menu settings.  
ILL. SETUP!  
Exchg batt!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
Setup menu data is invalid, or data  
recalled with the maintenance menu  
item “SETUP MAINTENANCE” –  
“AUTO BANK RECALLis invalid.  
Reset the items in the setup menu.  
NVRAM battery is exhausted.  
It is time to exchange the battery on the  
board. Contact your Sony service  
representative.  
LOW BATT!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
Battery pack power is low.  
Exchange with a charged battery pack.  
BATT EMPTY!  
Battery pack power is exhausted.  
for more information about exchanging  
battery packs.  
a) With respect to setting of basic menu item 016  
When a disc is inserted  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
Unknown FS!  
on, limit, off  
The loaded disc was formatted by an  
unknown file system.  
Eject or format the disc.  
more information about formatting.  
No FS!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
The file system cannot be detected.  
An unsupported disc was inserted.  
Eject the disc.  
ILL. Disc!  
Salvage NG  
Recovery of disc contents (salvage)  
failed.  
525/60 Clip  
625/50 Clip  
on, limit  
on, limit  
on, limit  
A disc recorded in NTSC format was  
inserted when this unit is in 625 line  
mode (PAL system).  
Use a disc recorded with the PAL system.  
A disc recorded in PAL format was  
inserted when this unit is in 525(U) or  
525(J) line mode (NTSC system).  
Use a disc recorded with the NTSC  
system.  
IMX50 Clip  
IMX40 Clip  
IMX30 Clip  
DVCAM Clip  
The recording format of the loaded disc To record on the disc, change the setting of  
differs from the format specified with  
basic menu item 031 “RECORDING  
FORMAT.”  
basic menu item 031.  
94) about how to change this setting.  
8-4 Alarms  
123  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
4CHx24 Clip  
8CHx16 Clip  
on, limit  
The number of channels and quantizing To record on the disc, change the setting of  
bits of the loaded disc differ from the maintenance menu item “AUDIO CONFIG”  
specifications of maintenance menu item - “DATA LENGTH.”  
“AUDIO CONFIG” - “DATA LENGTH.”  
(page 114) about how to change this  
setting.  
No Support!  
ILL. Index!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
A disc recorded in an unsupported  
recording format was inserted.  
Use a disc recorded in the MPEG IMX or  
DVCAM format.  
An index file error was detected.  
Format the disc.  
FORMAT NG!  
DI read err  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
Automatic format failed.  
Use another disc.  
A disc read error occurred.  
Try ejecting the disc and inserting it again,  
or insert another disc.  
DRV ADJ err  
Adjustment processing failed when a  
disc was inserted.  
a) With respect to setting of basic menu item 016  
During playback  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
525/60 Disc  
on, limit  
An attempt was made to play back a disc Use a disc recorded with the PAL system.  
recorded with the NTSC system when  
this unit is in 625 line mode (PAL  
system).  
625/50 Disc  
Disc Error!  
on, limit  
An attempt was made to play back a disc Use a disc recorded with the NTSC  
recorded with the PAL system when this system.  
unit is in 525(U) or 525(J) line mode  
(NTSC system).  
on, limit, off  
Normal playback is not possible because Use another disc.  
of a disc defect.  
You can check the state of a disc by  
checking playback condition marks (see  
a) With respect to setting of basic menu item 016  
During control panel operations  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
KEY INHI.!  
on  
An operation button inhibited by  
extended menu item 118 “KEY INHIBIT” extended menu item 118 to “off.”  
was pressed while the KEY INH  
Set the corresponding sub-item of  
indicator was lit.  
(page 108) about how to make this setting.  
REMOTE!  
on  
A button was pressed while the remote To operate from the front panel, wait until  
control switch was set to “REMOTE.”  
control by the remote device ends and then  
set the remote control switch to “LOCAL.”  
124  
8-4 Alarms  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
No Disc!  
on  
A button was pressed with no disc  
loaded.  
Operate after inserting a disc.  
No Disc!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
on  
An attempt to delete a clip was made  
with no disc loaded.  
No Disc!  
An attempt to format a disc was made  
with no disc loaded.  
REC INHI.!  
An attempt was made to record, display To perform these operations on the disc,  
an E-E picture, record an essence mark, set the Write Inhibit tab of the disc to the  
or add a quick scene selection sub clip. recording enabled position.  
REC INHI.!  
on  
An attempt was made to record, display To perform these operations, set extended  
an E-E picture, record an essence mark, menu item 310 to “off.”  
or add a quick scene selection sub clip  
while extended menu item 310 “REC  
INHIBIT” was set to “on.”  
(page 108) about how to make this setting.  
IMX50 Clip  
IMX40 Clip  
IMX30 Clip  
DVCAM Clip  
4CHx24 Clip  
8CHx16 Clip  
on, limit  
A recording or E-E display operation was To perform these operations on the disc,  
attempted on a disc recorded in a format change the setting of basic menu item 031.  
different from the setting of basic menu  
item 031 “RECORDING FORMAT.”  
94) about how to change this setting.  
REC INHI.!  
on, limit  
An attempt to save the current clip list  
was made while the REC INHI indicator the following write-protect settings.  
To perform these operations, cancel all of  
was lit.  
• Write Inhibit tab of the disc  
• Setting of extended menu item 310 “REC  
INHIBIT”  
• Mismatch between the recorded  
sections of the disc and the setting of  
basic menu item 031 “RECORDING  
FORMAT”  
REC INHI.!  
REC INHI.!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
An attempt to delete a clip was made  
while the REC INHI indicator was lit.  
An attempt to format a disc was made  
while the REC INHI indicator was lit.  
No Clip!  
on, limit  
A playback or search button was  
pressed for a disc containing no  
recorded clips.  
These operations are not possible.  
No Clip!  
on, limit, off  
on  
An attempt was made to delete a clip  
from a disc containing no recorded clips.  
Disc Top!  
The PREV button was pressed while  
stopped at the top of the disc, or an  
attempt was made to perform a high-  
speed reverse search.  
Disc End!  
on  
The NEXT button was pressed while  
stopped at the end of the disc, or an  
attempt was made to perform a high-  
speed forward search.  
MAX # Files  
on, limit, off  
The number of files on the disc had  
Insert a different disc with enough free  
reached the upper limit (5000), or there capacity.  
was not enough capacity in the General  
directory when an attempt was made to  
record, display an E-E picture, record an  
essence mark, or add a quick scene  
selection sub clip.  
Disc Full!  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to record or  
display an E-E picture when there was  
not enough free capacity on the disc, or  
when the number of recorded clips had  
reached the upper limit (300).  
8-4 Alarms  
125  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
MAX# SB CLP  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to add a sub clip These operations are not possible.  
when the number of registered sub clips  
had already reached the upper limit  
(300) of the specifications of this unit.  
CL OVER DUR  
Run Salvage  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to add a sub clip  
when the total duration of sub clips in the  
clip list had already reached the upper  
limit (24 hours) of the specifications of  
this unit.  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to record, display Try the operation again after executing the  
an E-E picture, record an essence mark, salvage function.  
or add a quick scene selection sub clip  
on a disc which requires clip recovery  
(salvage).  
CNT mode!  
TC EXT!  
on  
on  
A time code or user bits preset operation Try the operation again after selecting “TC”  
was attempted with “COUNTER”  
or “UB” with the COUNTER SEL button.  
selected by the COUNTER SEL button.  
A time code or user bits preset operation Try the operation again after setting the  
was attempted with the INT/EXT/RP188 INT/EXT/RP188 switch to INT and the  
switch is set to EXT and the PRESET/  
REGEN switch is set to PRESET.  
PRESET/REGEN switch to PRESET.  
(page 108) about how to make this setting.  
REGEN mode!  
on  
A time code or user bits preset operation  
was attempted with the PRESET/  
REGEN switch is set to REGEN.  
REC-PAUSE!  
REC mode!  
REC mode!  
on  
A time code or user bits preset operation Try the operation again after stopping  
was attempted with recording paused.  
recording.  
on, limit  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to switch video or  
audio signals during recording.  
An attempt was made to display the  
system menu “DISC MENU” during  
recording.  
REC mode!  
REC mode!  
on, limit  
The THUMBNAIL button was pressed  
during recording.  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to display DRIVE  
MAINTENANCE in the maintenance  
menu during recording.  
No SEL List  
on, limit  
The SUBCLIP button was pressed  
without loading a clip list from the disc  
into the current clip list.  
Try the operation again after loading a clip  
list.  
No SUB Clip  
SB CLP mode  
SUB CLIP NG  
on, limit  
on, limit  
on, limit  
A button in the playback control section Playback is not possible without a sub clip  
was pressed when there were no sub  
clips in the current clip list.  
in the current clip list.  
The SHIFT button and the THUMBNAIL Press the SUBCLIP button, turning it off,  
button were pressed together with the  
SUBCLIP button lit.  
and try the operation again.  
The SHIFT and SET buttons were  
pressed together when IN and OUT  
points were not set correctly (the OUT  
point was set before the IN point, etc.).  
Set the IN and OUT points correctly and try  
the operation again.  
No List!  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to delete a clip list This operation is not possible.  
with no clip lists saved on the disc.  
126  
8-4 Alarms  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
STOP ONCE!  
on, limit  
The SUBCLIP button was pressed  
during playback of a clip list.  
Try the operation again after stopping  
playback.  
STOP ONCE!  
No EM Space  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to display the  
CLIP menu during playback.  
Recording of an essence mark failed  
because the number of essence marks delete unneeded essence marks.  
recorded on the disc reached the upper  
Use the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software to  
limit of the specifications of this unit.  
EM Full!  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to add an essence  
mark with the number of recorded  
essence marks at the upper limit of the  
specifications of this unit.  
Formatting!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to display the  
DISC MENU page in the system menu  
during an auto format.  
Wait until the end of the auto format.  
Disc Damage  
An attempt was made to record, display This disc cannot be recorded. Exchange  
an E-E picture, record an essence mark, the disc.  
or add a quick scene selection sub clip  
when there was no free sparing area.  
Non AV Full  
Index File!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to record, display Insert a different disc with enough free  
an E-E picture, record an essence mark, capacity.  
or add a quick scene selection sub clip  
when there was no free Non-Real-Time  
space.  
An attempt was made to record to a disc Exchange the disc for one that contains an  
containing an unsupported index file.  
index file supported by this unit.  
Alternatively, format the disc (see page  
39).  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to record to a disc It may be possible to play back the disc, but  
File System  
File System  
with an unsupported file system.  
recording is not possible. Exchange the  
disc for one formatted in a file system  
supported by this unit. Alternatively, format  
the disc (see page 39).  
An attempt was made to record to a disc  
when its file system was set to inhibit  
recording.  
a) With respect to setting of basic menu item 016  
During reception of commands from an external device connected to the REMOTE connector  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
No Disc!  
on  
A recording, playback, search, or other  
command was received with no disc  
loaded.  
Try the operation again after loading a disc.  
REC INHI.!  
REC INHI.!  
on  
on  
A recording or E-E display command  
was received for a write-protected disc. Write Inhibit tab to the recording enabled  
position.  
Try the operation again after setting the  
A recording or E-E display command  
was received with extended menu item extended menu item 310 to “off.”  
310 “REC INHIBIT” set to “on.”  
Try the operation again after setting  
(page 108) about how to make this setting.  
IMX50 Clip  
IMX40 Clip  
IMX30 Clip  
DVCAM Clip  
4CHx24 Clip  
8CHx16 Clip  
on, limit  
A recording or E-E display command  
was received with basic menu item for a setting of basic menu item 031.  
disc recorded in a format different from  
the specification of basic menu item 031 See 7-2-2 “Basic Menu Operations” (page  
“RECORDING FORMAT.”  
Try the operation again after changing the  
94) about how to change this setting.  
8-4 Alarms  
127  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
Run Salvage  
on, limit  
A recording or E-E display command  
was received for a disc that needs clip  
recovery (salvage).  
Try the operation again after recovering  
clips from the disc (salvage function).  
MAX # Files  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
The number of files on the disc had  
Exchange the disc for one with enough  
reached the upper limit (5000), or there free capacity.  
was not enough capacity in the General  
directory when a command was  
received to record, display an E-E  
picture, record an essence mark, or add  
a quick scene selection sub clip.  
Disc Full!  
A command was received to record or  
display an E-E picture when there was  
not enough free capacity on the disc, or  
when the number of recorded clips had  
reached the upper limit (300).  
MAX# SB CLP  
CL OVER DUR  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
A command was received to add a sub These operations are not possible.  
clip when the number of registered sub  
clips had already reached the upper limit  
(300) of the specifications of this unit.  
A command was received to add a sub  
clip when the total duration of sub clips  
in the clip list had already reached the  
upper limit (24 hours) of the  
specifications of this unit.  
Disc Damage  
Non AV Full  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
A command was received to record,  
display an E-E picture, record an  
essence mark, or add a quick scene  
selection sub clip when there was no  
free sparing area.  
This disc cannot be recorded. Exchange  
the disc.  
A command was received to record,  
display an E-E picture, record an  
essence mark, or add a quick scene  
selection sub clip when there was no  
free Non-Real-Time space.  
Insert a different disc with enough free  
capacity.  
No Clip!  
on, limit  
on  
A playback or search command was  
received for a disc containing no  
recorded clips.  
These operations are not possible.  
Disc Top!  
Disc End!  
TC EXT!  
A PREV or reverse high-speed search  
command was received with the disc  
stopped at the top.  
on  
A NEXT or forward high-speed search  
command was received with the disc  
stopped at the end.  
on  
A time code or user bits preset  
command was received with the INT/  
Try the operation again after setting the  
INT/EXT/RP188 switch to INT and the  
EXT/RP188 switch is set to EXT and the PRESET/REGEN switch to PRESET.  
PRESET/REGEN switch is set to  
PRESET.  
(page 108) about how to make this setting.  
REGEN mode!  
on  
A time code or user bits preset  
command was received with the  
PRESET/REGEN switch is set to  
REGEN.  
128  
8-4 Alarms  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
Live Logg!  
on, limit  
A time code or user bit preset operation Set extended menu item 258 “LIVE  
was attempted with extended menu item LOGGING” to “off” before performing the  
258 “LIVE LOGGING” set to “on.”  
operation.  
(page 108) about how to make this setting.  
REC RUN!  
on  
on  
A time code or user bits preset  
command was received with the F-RUN/ RUN/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.  
R-RUN switch is set to R-RUN.  
Try the operation again after setting the F-  
(page 108) about how to make this setting.  
REC-PAUSE!  
A time code or user bits preset  
command was received with recording  
paused.  
Try the operation again after stopping  
recording.  
REC mode!  
REC mode!  
on, limit  
on, limit  
A command to switch video or audio  
signals was received during recording.  
A command to switch audio channels  
was received during recording.  
a) With respect to setting of basic menu item 016  
During recording and editing operations  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
Disc Error!  
on, limit, off  
Normal recording is not possible  
because of a disc defect.  
Use another disc.  
You can check the state of a disc by  
checking playback condition marks (see  
525/60 sig!  
625/50 sig!  
A mode err!  
on, limit  
A 525 system SDI signal was input with Input a 625 system SDI signal.  
this unit in 625 line mode (PAL system)  
and with “SDI” selected with the VIDEO  
INPUT SEL button.  
on, limit  
A 625 system SDI signal was input with Input a 525 system SDI signal.  
this unit in 525(U) or 525(J) line mode  
(NTSC system) and with “SDI” selected  
with the VIDEO INPUT SEL button.  
on, limit  
An editing operation was attempted on a To edit this disc, change the following  
recorded disc, when one of the following settings.  
audio settings differed from the settings • Maintenance menu item “AUDIO  
of this unit.  
• Number of quantizing bits and  
recording channels  
• Handling of digital audio signals (audio  
or non-audio)  
CONFIG” — “DATA LENGTH”  
• Maintenance menu item “AUDIO  
CONFIG” — “NON-AUDIO INPUT”  
(page 114) about how to make these  
settings.  
ILL. REF!  
ILL. REC!  
ILL. PLAY!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit  
The playback system and recording  
system are not synchronized.  
Input a reference video signal to the player  
and recorder.  
A sync error between encoder and input Contact your Sony service representative.  
signal occurred during recording.  
on, limit  
An audio/video phase error occurred  
during playback.  
MEM. Full!  
on, limit  
on, limit  
A memory write error occurred.  
MEM. Empty  
Playback data in memory was lost, and  
playback stopped.  
8-4 Alarms  
129  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
List Exists  
on, limit, off  
An attempt was made to edit a clip  
referenced by sub clips.  
Delete all clip lists.  
Clip End!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit  
An attempt was made to edit across clip Editing across multiple clips is not possible.  
boundaries.  
Recording  
More time than normal is required for  
recording processing, because  
recording is being done while avoiding  
defects on the disc.  
Wait until recording finishes.  
a) With respect to setting of basic menu item 016  
Alarms relating to audio and video signals  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
REF NON-STD  
on, limit, off  
A signal other than a standard reference Input a standard reference video signal to  
video signal was input to the REF  
VIDEO IN connector.  
the REF VIDEO IN connector.  
No INPUT!  
on  
on  
An attempt to record was made with no Input a video signal, and select it.  
input video signal.  
VIN NON-STD  
Recording is being done with a signal  
Input a standard video signal to the VIDEO  
other than a standard video signal input IN connector.  
to the VIDEO IN connector.  
EMPHASIS!  
on  
An unsupported audio emphasis signal This unit does not support “EMPHASIS  
(“EMPHASIS ON” signal) was input.  
ON” audio signals. Input “EMPHASIS OFF”  
signal.  
a) With respect to setting of basic menu item 016  
Alarms relating to sensors and drives  
Message in time Display  
Description  
Action  
a)  
data display  
condition  
HUMID!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
Condensation was detected in the unit. See 8-2 “Condensation” (page 121).  
FAN Stopped  
The motor of the main unit fan has  
stopped.  
Contact your Sony service representative.  
Note  
DR-FAN Stop  
High TEMP!  
High TEMP!  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
on, limit, off  
The motor of a drive fan has stopped.  
Temperatures have risen within the unit.  
Temperatures have risen within a drive.  
The unit will operate, but continued use in  
this state will result in rising temperatures  
in the unit or drive, with the risk of fire or  
damage to the unit.  
a) With respect to setting of basic menu item 016  
130  
8-4 Alarms  
Appendixes  
1
105 (4 / )  
4
Specifications  
General  
Power requirements  
100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
DC, battery  
Power consumption  
AC: 37W  
DC or battery: 31W  
Peak inrush current  
1
230 (9 / )  
8
(1)Power ON, current probe method: 65  
A (240 V), 30 A (100 V)  
(2)Hot switching inrush current,  
measured in accordance with  
European standard EN55103-1: 35 A  
(230 V)  
Unit: mm (inches)  
Operating temperature  
0ºC to 40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF)  
Storage temperature  
–20ºC to +60ºC (–4ºF to +140ºF)  
Operating relative humidity  
System  
Recording/Playback format  
Video  
MPEG IMX (50/40/30 Mbps), DVCAM  
(25 Mbps)  
20% to 90%  
Proxy video  
MPEG-4  
Audio  
Mass  
4.7 kg (10 lb 5 oz)  
1)  
External dimensions (w/h/d, excluding projections)  
230 × 105 × 340mm  
MPEG IMX: 16 bits/48 kHz (8 channels)  
or 24 bits/48 kHz (4 channels)  
DVCAM: 16 bits/48 kHz (4 channels)  
1
1
1
(9 / × 4 / × 13 / inches)  
8
4
2
Proxy audio  
A-law (8/4 channels, 8 bits, 8 kHz)  
1) The MPEG-4 Codec is a product of Ingenient Technologies, Inc.  
Recording/Playback time  
MPEG IMX  
50 Mbps: 45 min.  
40 Mbps: 55 min.  
30 Mbps: 68 min.  
DVCAM 85 min.  
Search speed  
Jog mode  
Specifications  
131  
       
1 times normal speed  
Shuttle mode  
20 times normal speed  
Black burst  
0.286 V (NTSC), 0.3V (PAL), 75 Ω,  
negative sync  
Composite sync  
VIDEO IN  
BNC type (×1), composite  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, negative sync  
Video performance  
Sampling frequency  
Y: 13.5 MHz, R–Y/B–Y: 6.75 MHz  
10 bits/sample  
Analog audio inputs  
AUDIO IN 1/3, 2/4  
Quantization  
XLR 3-pin, female (×2), +4/0/–3/–6 dBu  
Analog composite input to analog composite output  
Bandwidth: 30 Hz to 4.5 MHz +0.5/–1.5  
dB (NTSC), 25 Hz to 5.5 MHz +0.5/–  
1.5 dB (PAL)  
(selectable with menu), 10 kΩ,  
balanced  
Time code input  
S/N ratio: 53 dB or more  
Differential gain: 2% or less  
Differential phase: 2° or less  
Y/C delay: 20 ns or less  
K-factor (2T pulse): 2% or less  
TC IN  
BNC type (×1), SMPTE time code, 0.5  
Vp-p to 18 Vp-p, 3.3 kΩ, unbalanced  
(network)  
100Base-TX/10Base-T  
RJ-45 type (×1)  
100BASE-TX: complying with IEEE  
802.3u  
10BASE-T: complying with IEEE 802.3  
Processor adjustment range  
Video level  
Chroma level to +3 dB  
Set up/black level  
to +3 dB  
Output connectors  
30 IRE/ 210 mV  
Chroma phase/hue  
30°  
System sync phase  
3 µs  
Digital signal outputs  
SDI OUT (SUPER)  
BNC type (×1)  
SDI format (270 Mbps), SMPTE 259M/  
CCIR656-III  
System SC phase  
200 ns  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUT 1/2, 3/4  
BNC type (×2), complying with AES-  
3id-1995  
Audio performance  
S400 (i.LINK)  
Frequency response  
6-pin (×1), complying with IEEE 1394  
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5/–1.0 dB (0 dB at 1  
kHz)  
Analog video outputs  
VIDEO OUT 1, 2(SUPER)  
Dynamic range More than 90 dB  
Distortion  
Head room  
Less than 0.05% (at 1kHz)  
20/18/16/12 dB (Selectable with menu)  
BNC type (×2), composite, 1.0 Vp-p,  
75 Ω, sync negative  
Analog audio outputs  
AUDIO OUT 1/3, 2/4  
XLR 3-pin, male (×2), +4/0/–3/–6 dBu  
Input connectors  
Digital signal inputs  
(selectable with menu), 600 Ω loading,  
low impedance, balanced  
SDI IN  
BNC type (×1)  
SDI format (270 Mbps), SMPTE 259M/  
CCIR656-III  
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) IN 1/2, 3/4  
BNC type (×2), complying with AES-  
Output for headphones  
PHONES  
JM-60 Stereo phone jack (×1), –to –13  
dBu, 8 Ω, unbalanced  
3id-1995  
Time code output  
TC OUT BNC type (×1), SMPTE time code, 2.2  
Vp-p 3 dB, 600 Ω, unbalanced  
S400 (i.LINK)  
6-pin (×1), complying with IEEE 1394  
Analog video inputs  
REF VIDEO IN  
Remote control connectors  
BNC type (×1)  
REMOTE  
D-sub 9-pin (×1), for connection of  
editing control unit, RS-422A standard  
132  
Specifications  
S400 (i.LINK)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
6-pin (×1), complying with IEEE 1394,  
supporting file access mode  
Notes  
• Always make a test recording, and verify that it was  
recorded successfully.  
Power input/output connectors  
DC IN 12V  
DC OUT 12V  
XLR 4-pin, male (×1), 11 to 17 V DC  
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY  
KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON  
ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS  
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS  
OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO  
RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.  
• Always verify that the unit is operating properly before  
use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF  
ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON  
ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR  
PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS  
UNIT, EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR  
AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR FOR  
ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER.  
1)  
Round type 4-pin, female (×1)  
When driven by AC power: DC 14.5 V,  
Max. 5W  
When driven by DC power or battery: DC  
11 to 17 V, Max. 5W  
1) Use as power source for BVR-3 Remote Control Unit (not supplied) and  
RM-280 Editing Controller (not supplied).  
Others  
Video panel  
Picture: 3.5 type  
Pixel resolution: 211,200 pixels (960  
wide × 220 high)  
Effective picture elements: more than  
99.99%  
Accessories supplied  
Operation manuals  
English version (1)  
Japanese version (1)  
CD-ROM manual (1)  
PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software (1)  
Connector caps For ~AC IN/DC IN 12V connector (1)  
For AUDIO IN connectors (2)  
For AUDIO OUT connectors (2)  
For BNC connectors (12)  
For  
/ S400 (i.LINK) connector (1)  
For REMOTE connector (1)  
For DC OUT 12V connector (1)  
Accessories not supplied  
AC power cord  
• For the customers in the U.S.A and Canada  
Part No. 1-551-812-41 (125 V, 10 A, about 2.4 m)  
• For the customers in the United Kingdom  
Part No. 1-777-823-12 (250 V, 10 A, about 2.0 m)  
• For the customers in European countries other than the  
United Kingdom  
Part No. 1-551-631-61 (250 V, 10 A, about 2.0 m)  
Shoulder strap (Part No. A-6772-374-C)  
Related products  
Battery packs  
BP-GL95, BP-GL65, BP-L80S, BP-  
L60S  
RM-280 editing controller  
Specifications  
133  
       
Using the Shoulder Belt  
The following figures show how to fit the shoulder belt  
(not supplied).  
Caution  
If you fit the shoulder belt incorrectly, the unit may fall  
down and cause body injury. Follow the procedures  
described below to fit or remove the shoulder belt.  
To fit the shoulder belt  
Press and pull up.  
To remove the shoulder belt  
While pressing down the indication PRESS, move the  
clip downwards to release it.  
134  
Using the Shoulder Belt  
     
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
Thank you for your purchasing this Sony product. Please read the following notice before using the product. By installing,  
copying or otherwise using the product, you will be deemed to have understood and agreed to the content of the notice.  
Notice Concerning Software Governed by the GNU GPL/LGPL  
This product includes software to which the GNU General Public License (“GPL”) or GNU Lesser General Public License  
(“LGPL”) applies. Under the terms of the GPL/LGPL, of which a copy is attached, you have the right to obtain, modify,  
and distribute copies of the source code of this software.  
Specific instructions for downloading the source code can be found at the following URL:  
http://www.sony.net/Products/Linux/  
Please note that we cannot respond to inquiries regarding the content of the source code.  
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
Version 2, June 1991  
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU  
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software  
is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any  
other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU  
Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make  
sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you  
receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs;  
and that you know you can do these things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender  
the rights.  
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.  
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the  
rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these  
terms so they know their rights.  
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal  
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.  
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty  
for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what  
they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.  
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of  
a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have  
made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
135  
 
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it  
may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program  
or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:  
that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated  
into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)  
Each licensee is addressed as “you”.  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  
The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents  
constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).  
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided  
that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of  
warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other  
recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection  
in exchange for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program,  
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet  
all of these conditions:  
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any  
change.  
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the  
Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.  
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running  
for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate  
copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users  
may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.  
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based  
on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from  
the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and  
its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same  
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms  
of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part  
regardless of who wrote it.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,  
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on  
the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this  
License.  
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form  
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:  
136  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the  
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,  
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than  
your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding  
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software  
interchange; or,  
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This  
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or  
executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)  
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable  
work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface  
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special  
exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary  
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,  
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.  
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering  
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though  
third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.  
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any  
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your  
rights under this License.  
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses  
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.  
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission  
to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept  
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate  
your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the  
Program or works based on it.  
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a  
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You  
may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein.  
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.  
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to  
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the  
conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as  
to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a  
consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free  
redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you  
could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the  
section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest  
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution  
system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide  
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the  
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot  
impose that choice.  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
137  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted  
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical  
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus  
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.  
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to  
time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems  
or concerns.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which  
applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version  
or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number  
of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.  
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different,  
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write  
to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals  
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software  
generally.  
NO WARRANTY  
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE  
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED  
IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS”  
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH  
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY  
SERVICING,REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY  
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE  
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,  
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO  
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED  
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM  
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs  
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this  
is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.  
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most  
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where  
the full notice is found.  
Copyright ©  
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License  
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.  
138  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied  
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public  
License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free  
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.  
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:  
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright © year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY;  
for details type ‘show w’.  
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.  
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of  
course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’, they could even be mouse-  
clicks or menu items-whatever suits your program.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer”  
for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers)  
written by James Hacker.  
, 1 April 1989  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a  
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is  
what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
Version 2.1, February 1999  
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.  
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License,  
version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU  
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the  
software is free for all its users.  
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages-typically  
libraries-of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you  
first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any  
particular case, based on the explanations below.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed  
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that  
you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free  
programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to  
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library  
or if you modify it.  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
139  
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights  
that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the  
library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making  
changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.  
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives  
you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.  
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library  
is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so  
that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.  
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company  
cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we  
insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified  
in this license.  
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the  
GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary  
General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free  
programs.  
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally  
speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such  
linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax  
criteria for linking other code with the library.  
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the  
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-  
free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.  
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.  
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so  
that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent  
case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting  
the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.  
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large  
body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people  
to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.  
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a  
program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version  
of the Library.The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to  
the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived  
from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the  
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public  
License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.  
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application  
programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.  
140  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work  
based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work  
containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into  
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)  
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete  
source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the  
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The  
act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents  
constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true  
depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium,  
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and  
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and  
distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection  
in exchange for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library,  
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet  
all of these conditions:  
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.  
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any  
change.  
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.  
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program  
that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good  
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates,  
and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.  
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent  
of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this  
function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square  
roots.)  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from  
the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and  
its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same  
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of  
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part  
regardless of who wrote it.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,  
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the  
Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
141  
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy  
of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU  
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU  
General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other  
change in these notices.  
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License  
applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.  
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.  
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable  
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding  
machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium  
customarily used for software interchange.  
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent  
access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though  
third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.  
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being  
compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work  
of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.  
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the  
Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is  
therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.  
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the  
work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially  
significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be  
true is not precisely defined by law.  
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small  
inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is  
legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under  
Section 6.)  
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms  
of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly  
with the Library itself.  
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library  
to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided  
that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such  
modifications.  
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its  
use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays  
copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing  
the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:  
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including  
whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work  
is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object  
code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable  
142  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the  
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)  
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at  
run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions  
into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as  
long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.  
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified  
in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.  
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to  
copy the above specified materials from the same place.  
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.  
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs  
needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need  
not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components  
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself  
accompanies the executable.  
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not  
normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library  
together in an executable that you distribute.  
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other  
library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate  
distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided  
that you do these two things:  
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other  
library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.  
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and  
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.  
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this  
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will  
automatically terminate your rights under this License.  
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses  
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.  
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission  
to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept  
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your  
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library  
or works based on it.  
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a  
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and  
conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You  
are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.  
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to  
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the  
conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
143  
to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a  
consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free  
redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you  
could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the  
section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest  
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution  
system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide  
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the  
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot  
impose that choice.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted  
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical  
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus  
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.  
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from  
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new  
problems or concerns.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which  
applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version  
or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version  
number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.  
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible  
with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software  
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be  
guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing  
and reuse of software generally.  
NO WARRANTY  
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE  
LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER  
PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED  
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE  
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE  
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY  
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE  
LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,  
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO  
USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED  
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY  
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
144  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries  
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free  
software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or,  
alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).  
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file  
to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer  
to where the full notice is found.  
Copyright ©  
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public  
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later  
version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the  
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser  
General Public License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the  
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer”  
for the library, if necessary.  
Here is a sample; alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by  
James Random Hacker.  
, 1 April 1990  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
That’s all there is to it!  
The BSD Copyright  
This product includes software to which the BSD license applies.  
Please note that we cannot respond to inquiries regarding the content of the source code.  
The BSD License  
Copyright © The Regents of the University of California.  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following  
conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products  
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
145  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS  
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF  
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
This product includes software thttpd to which the license below applies.  
Please note that we cannot respond to inquiries regarding the content of the source code.  
Copyright © 1995, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001 by Jef Poskanzer <jef@acme.com>.  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following  
conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS  
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF  
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
This product includes software ucd-snmp to which the license below applies.  
Please note that we cannot respond to inquiries regarding the content of the source code.  
----- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----  
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University  
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000  
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California  
All Rights Reserved  
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is  
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this  
permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of  
California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written  
permission.  
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH  
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  
FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER  
RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,  
146  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.  
----- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----  
Copyright © 2001, Networks Associates Technology, Inc.  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following  
conditions are met:  
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
• Neither the name of the NAI Labs nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived  
from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,  
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR  
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,  
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----  
Portions of this code are copyright © 2001, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following  
conditions are met:  
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
• The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  
without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT  
HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE  
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER  
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,  
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit  
147  
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License  
This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License. For the personal and non-commercial use of  
a consumer for (i) encoding video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard (“MPEG-4 Video”) and/or (ii)  
decoding MPEG-4 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was  
obtained from a video provider licensed by MPEG LA to provide MPEG-4 Video.  
No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use.  
Additional information including that relating to promotional, internal and commercial uses and licensing may be obtained  
from MPEG LA, LLC.  
See http://www.mpegla.com  
148  
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License  
 
through electric circuits only and  
then come out from the output  
connectors, without passing through  
electromagnetic conversion circuits  
such as recording heads.  
Proxy AV data  
Low-resolution data with a video  
bandwidth of 1.5 Mbps and an audio  
bandwidth of 64 kbps per channel.  
This unit records proxy AV data  
automatically whenever high-  
resolution MPEG IMX or DVCAM  
data is recorded.  
Glossary  
AES/EBU  
A standard established jointly by the  
AES (Audio Engineering Society)  
and EBU (European Broadcasting  
Union) for serial transmission of  
digital audio. Two channels of audio  
can be transmitted via a single  
connector.  
Essence mark  
A type of metadata that may be set for  
a specified frame.  
For more efficient searches,  
XDCAM equipment records essence  
marks as part of Non-RealTime  
metadata, and uses them to display  
thumbnails.  
Reference video signal  
A video signal that contains a sync  
signal or sync and burst signals, used  
as a reference for synchronization of  
video equipment.  
Clip  
A recording unit. Clips are created  
every time recording starts and stops.  
i.LINK  
SDI  
Another name for the IEEE1394-  
1995 standards and their revisions.  
XDCAM uses the i.LINK interface to  
transfer DV streams by the AV/C  
protocol, and to read and write  
MPEG IMX and DVCAM data files  
by FAM (file access mode).  
Serial Digital Interface. An interface  
standardized as SMPTE 259M which  
enables the transmission of an  
uncompressed digital component  
stream.  
Clip list  
A list of locations in the material  
recorded on the disc, arranged in any  
order. Clips lists can be created with  
the scene selection function of this  
unit, and with the supplied PDZ-1  
Proxy Browsing Software.  
S/N  
Signal-to-Noise ratio. The relation of  
the strength of the desired signal to  
the accompanying electronic  
interference, the noise. If S/N is high,  
sounds are reproduced with less noise  
and pictures are reproduced clearly  
without snow.  
Metadata  
Information about the properties of  
video and audio content. XDCAM  
records metadata such as UMIDs and  
essence marks, and the supplied  
PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software can  
be used to record information such as  
titles and comments.  
Color subcarrier  
In a composite video signal, a signal  
superimposed upon the picture  
(luminance) information for the  
purpose of conveying the associated  
color information. Color and  
saturation information is conveyed  
by the phase and amplitude of the  
color subcarrier. Also called  
subcarrier.  
SNMP  
Simple Network Management  
Protocol. XDCAM uses this protocol  
to monitor equipment operating  
status via network connectors.  
MXF  
Material eXchange Format. A file  
exchange format developed by the  
Pro-MPEG Forum. Equipment from  
different manufacturers can  
exchange files in this format.  
Composite video signal  
A video signal in which luminance  
and chrominance are combined along  
with timing reference “sync”  
information to make composite  
video.  
Sub clip  
One of the sections which make up a  
clip list. A sub clip may be part of a  
clip or an entire clip.  
Non-audio  
General term for audio signals other  
than linear PCM, such as Dolby E  
and Dolby Digital (AC-3).  
XDCAM can record non-audio as an  
input signal.  
1)  
Thumbnail image  
1)  
A reduced still picture of video for  
display on a GUI screen. XDCAM  
creates thumbnail images from proxy  
video, and displays them as index  
pictures on GUI screens.  
Drop frame mode  
SMPTE time code runs at 30 frames/  
second, while the NTSC color  
1) Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.  
television system runs at about 29.97  
frames/second. Drop frame mode  
adjusts the running of time code to  
eliminate the discrepancy between  
time code value and actual time by  
dropping two frames from the time  
code value at the beginning of each  
minute except every tenth minute.  
Non-drop-frame mode  
Time code  
A mode of advancing time code  
which ignores the difference in frame  
values between real time and the time  
code. Using this mode produces a  
difference of approximately 86  
seconds per day between real time  
and time code, which causes  
problems when editing programs in  
units of seconds using the number of  
frames as a reference.  
A digitally encoded signal which is  
recorded with video data to identify  
each frame of the video by hour,  
minute, second and frame number.  
SMPTE time code is applied to  
NTSC system, and EBU time code to  
PAL and SECAM systems.  
E-E mode  
Electric-to-Electric mode. When you  
operate a VDR in E-E mode, input  
video and/or audio signals pass  
Glossary  
149  
   
UMID  
Unique Material Identifier. A  
standard (SMPTE 330M) for video  
and audio metadata. The Basic  
section of a UMID contains a  
globally unique number and a  
material number for the identification  
of recorded material. An optional  
section called the “Source Pack”  
contains information such as the time  
and location of recording. A UMID  
with the Basic section only is called a  
Basic UMID. A UMID with the  
Source Pack is called an Extended  
UMID.  
User bits  
A total of 32 bits are provided in the  
time code which the user can use to  
record such information as date, reel  
number, or scene number on video  
tape. Also called user's bits.  
150  
Glossary  
E
Index  
A
Clip List  
AC power  
Accessories  
F
File access mode  
ALL/CH-1, CH-2 to CH-4 adjustment  
Analog  
AUDIO  
Audio  
AUDIO INPUT  
FTP  
G
Audio level  
AUDIO MONITOR  
Audio recording  
H
D
Digital  
I
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)  
Discs  
B
J
Jog  
C
Index  
151  
 
K
Shoulder belt  
Shuttle  
L
Line mode  
Power  
M
Superimposed text information (See  
also “Text information”) 35  
Q
R
N
T
TIME CODE  
Nonlinear editing system  
connection 27  
Recording and playback control  
section 16  
O
On/standby  
Operating mode selection/menu setting  
section 13  
Time code  
S
P
Time data  
152  
Index  
The material contained in this manual consists of information  
that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely  
for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this  
manual.  
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any  
portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other  
than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described  
in this manual without the express written permission of Sony  
Corporation.  
PDW-R1  
Sony Corporation  
(SY)  
http://www.sony.net/  
© 2006  
3-991-786-02 (1)  

Toshiba HDD2189 User Manual
Sony Ericsson Z320i User Manual
Seagate ST3500641NS User Manual
SanDisk FIPS Edition User Manual
Samsung Spinpiont HM120II User Manual
Samsung SGH T729 SGH Blast Series User Manual
Samsung SGH 2488 User Manual
Panasonic SL SW851C User Manual
Norcent Technologies SDDuo 1GB UPC TBD User Manual
Nokia CLASSIC 6700 User Manual